COIMBATORE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY...15EC81 Project Work & Viva Voce - - 6 - EEC TOTAL CREDITS 18...

COIMBATORE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY(Government Aided Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

COIMBATORE - 641 014, TAMILNADU, INDIA

Department of Electronics and Communication EngineeringB.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Curriculum and Syllabi

THIRD TO EIGHTH SEMESTER

Under Choice Based Credit System( For the students admitted during the academic year 2015 - 2016 and onwards )

DIAMOND JUBILEE(1956 - 2016)

INDEX

1. Vision and Mission of the Institute 1

2. Vision and Mission of the Department of Electronics and Communication 2Engineering

3. Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs) of the Electronics and 3Communication Engineering

4. Programme Outcomes (POs) of the Electronics and Communication 6Engineering

5. Subjects of Study 9

6. Syllabus for Semester - III 15

7. Syllabus for Semester - IV 29

8. Syllabus for Semester - V 41

9. Syllabus for Semester - VI 51

10. Syllabus for Semester - VII 61

11. Syllabus for Semester - VIII / Electives 70

S.No Contents Page No.

1


VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE

VISION

The Institute strives to inculcate a sound knowledge in engineering along with realized social responsibilitiesto enable its students to combat the current and impending challenges faced by our country and to extendtheir expertise to the global arena.

MISSION

The Mission of CIT is to impart high quality education and training to its students to make them world-class engineers with a foresight to the changes and problems and pioneers to offer innovative solutionsto benefit the nation and the world at large.

2

COIMBATORE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT

VISION

The Vision of the department is to impart knowledge in the field of Electronics and CommunicationEngineering so as to nurture excellence in students, mould their capability to meet current and impendingchallenges and ignite aspirations to become innovators and entrepreneurs, thereby benefit the nationand world.

MISSION

The Mission of Electronics and Communication Engineering Department is

M1 : To impart high quality education and training to the students in the field of Electronics andCommunication Engineering

M2 : To promote creation and dissemination of knowledge.

M3 : To provide a framework for innovation and collaborative research with industry.

M4 : To equip the graduate students with an attitude for professional career and continuous learning.

3



PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

The following Program Educational Objectives are designed based on the Department Mission

PEO 1 : The graduates will exhibit knowledge in Mathematics, Engineering fundamentals, Electronicsand Communication Engineering and related fields for professional achievement in industryand organizations

PEO 2 : The graduates will be able to identify, analyze and apply engineering concepts for design ofElectronics and Communication Systems and demonstrate multidisciplinary expertise to meetcontemporary requirements.

PEO 3 : The graduates will be able to function with leadership qualities, team spirit, managerial skills,attitude and ethics needed for successful career and entrepreneurship.

4



PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES(POs & PSOs)

Students in the Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering program at the time of theirgraduation should be in possession of :

PO1 : apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering fundamentals to solve problemsin the domain of Electronics and Communication engineering

PO2 : identify, formulate and analyze complex problems in real world using principles of scienceand engineering

PO3 : design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic constraintssuch as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health, safety, manufacturabilityand sustainability

PO4 : conduct experiments, analyze and interpret experimental results and synthesize informationto provide valid conclusion

PO5 : apply techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice

PO6 : develop and model complex electronic hardware and software systems for human needs.

PO7 : comprehend the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental, andsocietal context

PO8 : apply professional and ethical principles and function with responsibility

PO9 : to identify areas of interest and to function an individual and as a member or leader inmultidisciplinary teams

PO10 : communicate facts successfully with people in engineering domain and effectively designand prepare documents and reports

PO11 : acquire knowledge of contemporary issues and recognize the need for lifelong learning

PO12 : apply knowledge of engineering and management principles in multidisciplinary environmentand projects.

PSO1 : design and develop models for signal processing and communication systems

PSO2 : design, develop and test electronic and embedded systems for applications with real timeconstraints

5



CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Curriculum from the Academic Year 2015 - 2016 and onwards

15ECM31 Complex Variables, Linear Algebra and PartialDifferential Equations 3 2 0 4 BS

15EC31 Electron Devices 3 0 0 3 PC15EC32 Signals and Systems 3 0 0 3 ES15EC33 Digital Circuits 3 0 0 3 PC15EC34 Networks and Transmission Lines 3 0 0 3 ES15EC35 C Programming 3 2 0 4 EEC15HSS01 Science of Creativity & Professional Ethics 1 0 0 1 HS15EC36 Circuits and Electron Devices Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC37 Digital Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC

TOTAL CREDITS 23

Semester IIICourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

15ECM41 Probability and Random Process 3 2 0 4 BS15EC41 Electronic Circuits 4 0 0 4 PC15EC42 Linear Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 PC15EC43 Principles of Communication 3 0 0 3 PC15EC44 Electromagnetic Fields and Waveguides 3 0 0 3 ES15EC45 Computer Organization and Microprocessor 3 2 0 4 ES15EC46 Electronic Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC47 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory. 0 0 2 1 PC15EC48 Seminar and Technical Writing 0 0 2 1 EEC

TOTAL CREDITS 24

Semester IVCourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

6

15EC51 Data Communication and Networks 3 0 0 3 PC15EC52 Microcontroller Based System Design 3 0 0 3 PC15EC53 Discrete Time Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 PC15EC54 Control Systems 3 2 0 4 ES

Elective -I 3 0 0 3 OE/PEElective- II 3 0 0 3 OE/PE

15EC55 Discrete Time Signal Processing Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC56 Microcontrollers Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC68 Mini Project - - 2 - EEC

TOTAL CREDITS 22

Semester VCourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

15EC61 Antennas and Wave Propagation 3 0 0 3 PC15EC62 Digital Communication Systems 4 0 0 4 PC15EC63 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 PC15EC64 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 PC15EC65 Data Structures and Algorithms 3 2 0 4 EEC

Elective-III 3 0 0 3 PE15EC66 Embedded Systems Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC67 Analog and Digital Communication Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC68 Mini Project - - 4 2 EEC

TOTAL CREDITS 24

Semester VICourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

15EC71 RF and Microwave Engineering 2 2 0 3 PC15EC72 Wireless Communication and Networks 3 0 0 3 PC15EC73 Optical Communication Networks 3 0 0 3 PC15EC74 VLSI Design 4 0 0 4 PC

Elective - IV 3 0 0 3 PE15EC75 RF and Microwave Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC76 Wireless Communication and Networks Laboratory 0 0 2 1 PC15EC81 Project Work & Viva Voce - - 6 - EEC

TOTAL CREDITS 18

Semester VIICourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

7

Elective - V 3 0 0 3 PEElective - VI 3 0 0 3 PEElective - VII 3 0 0 3 PEElective - VIII 3 0 0 3 PEElective - IX 3 0 0 3 PE

15EC81 Project Work & Viva Voce - - 6 6 EECTOTAL CREDITS 21

Semester VIIICourseCode Course Name L T P C Category

8

LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

15ECE01 Multimedia Compression and Networks 3 0 0 315ECE02 Digital Switching and Transmission 3 0 0 315ECE03 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 315ECE04 Verilog HDL 3 0 0 315ECE05 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3

Semester VCourseCode Course Name L T P C

15ECE06 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 315ECE07 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 315ECE08 Advanced Processor Architecture 3 0 0 315ECE09 Automotive Electronics 3 0 0 315ECE10 Wearable Systems 3 0 0 315ECE11 Soft Computing and Applications 3 0 0 315ECE12 MEMS 3 0 0 315ECE13 Power Electronics 3 0 0 315ECE14 Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility 3 0 0 3

Semester VICourseCode Course Name L T P C

15ECE15 Information Theory and Coding 3 0 0 315ECE16 Communication System Design 3 0 0 315ECE17 Modern Antennas 3 0 0 315ECE18 RF Microelectronics 3 0 0 315ECE19 Real Time Controllers 3 0 0 315ECE20 Nano Electronics 3 0 0 315ECE21 Robotics 3 0 0 315ECE22 Parallel and Distributed Processing 3 0 0 3

Semester VIICourseCode Course Name L T P C

9

15ECE23 Cognitive Radio Communication 3 0 0 315ECE24 Wireless Adhoc and Sensor Networks 3 0 0 315ECE25 Wireless Networks and Standards 3 0 0 315ECE26 Foundation Skills for Integrated Product Development 3 0 0 315ECE27 Real Time Microcomputer Systems 3 0 0 315ECE28 Radar and Navigational Aids 3 0 0 315ECE29 CMOS Analog IC Design 3 0 0 315ECE30 Internet of Things 3 0 0 315ECE31 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 315ECE32 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 315ECE33 Biosignal Processing 3 0 0 3

Semester VIIICourseCode Course Name L T P C

10


LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVES

15CEE35 Disaster Management 3 0 0 3 All Branches

15CEE36 Renewable Energy Resources 3 0 0 3 All Branches

15CEE38 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3 All Branches

15CEE39 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management 3 0 0 3 All Branches

15CEE40 Principles of Sustainable Development 3 0 0 3 All Branches

15CEE41 Safety Engineering in Building 3 0 0 3 All Branches

Course Name L T P CCourse Code Eligible Branches

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

15MEOE01 Robotics 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE02 Low Cost Automation 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE03 Adaptive Control and Process Dynamics 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE04 Project Planning and Management 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE05 Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE06 Resource Management Techniques 2 2 0 3 All Branches15MEOE07 Sustainable Development 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MEOE08 Processing and Applications of Biomaterials 3 0 0 3 All except CSE & IT15MEOE09 Numerical Simulation of Fluid Flow 3 0 0 3 All Circuit Branches15MEOE10 Solar Energy Utilisation 3 0 0 3 Civil & Chemical


DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

15EEOE01 Energy Auditing 3 0 0 3 ECE, Mech,Chemical, Civil

15EEOE02 Solar and Wind Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 ECE, Mech,Chemical

15EEOE03 Hybrid Smart Vehicles 3 0 0 3 All Branchesexcept Civil,

Chemical15EEE07 Electrical Safety 3 0 0 3 All Branches15EEE14 Energy Efficient Lighting System 3 0 0 3 All Branches


DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

11

15ECOE01 Consumer Electronics 3 0 0 3 Civil & Mech15ECOE02 ARM System Architecture 3 0 0 3 CSE & IT15ECOE03 Broadband Communication 3 0 0 3 Mech, EEE, CSE & IT15ECOE04 Robotics for Industrial Applications 3 0 0 3 Mech, CSE & IT15ECOE05 Signal Processing and its Applications 3 0 0 3 Chemical, Mech & CSE

Course NameCourse Code Eligible Branches


L T P C

15CSOE01 Fundamentals of Software 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech,Engineering Chemical & Civil

15CSOE02 Introduction to Data 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech,Warehousing and Data Mining Chemical & Civil

15CSOE03 Introduction to Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 Mech, Chemical &Civil

15CSOE04 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech,Chemical & Civil

15CSOE05 Customer Relationship Management 3 0 0 3 IT, EEE, ECE, Mech,Essentials Chemical & Civil

15CSOE06 E-commerce 3 0 0 3 IT, EEE, ECE, Mech,Chemical & Civil


DEPARTMENT OF CSE

L T P C

15ITOE01 Digital Computer Basics 3 0 0 3 Mech, Civil & Chem15ITOE02 Programming in Java 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech, Civil &

Chemical15ITOE03 Fundamentals of Database Systems 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech, Civil &

Chemical15ITOE04 Cloud Computing Fundamentals 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech, Civil &

Chemical15ITOE05 Information Security Fundamentals 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE, Mech, Civil &

Chemical15ITOE06 Introduction to Human 3 0 0 3 CSE, EEE, ECE, Mech,

Computer Interaction Civil & Chemical15ITOE07 Enterprise Resource Planning Concepts 3 0 0 3 CSE, EEE, ECE, Mech,

Civil & Chemical


DEPARTMENT OF IT

L T P C

12

15CHOE01 Industrial Safety Engineering 3 0 0 3 All Branches15CHOE02 Risk Analysis and Hazop 3 0 0 3 All Branches15CHOE03 Green Technology 3 0 0 3 All Branches15CHOE04 Corrosion Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3 All Branches15CHOE05 Introduction to Chemical Engineering 3 0 0 3 All Branches


DEPARTMENT OF CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

L T P C

15MOE01 Graph Theory and Its Applications 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MOE02 Methods of Applied Mathematics 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MOE03 Linear and Non-Linear Programming 3 0 0 3 All Branches15MOE04 Probability and Random Processes 3 0 0 3 All Branches


DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

L T P C

15POE01 Introduction to Nanoscience 3 0 0 3 All Branches except ITand Nanotechnology

15POE02 Physics and Technology of Thin Films 3 0 0 3 Mech, EEE, ECE &Chemical

15POE03 Solar Cell Fundamentals and 3 0 0 3 EEE, ECE & ChemicalMaterials

15POE04 Advanced Material Processing 3 0 0 3 Mech & ChemicalTechnologies


DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

L T P C

15COE01 Medical Nano Technology 3 0 0 3 Chemical15COE02 Advanced Drug Delivery System 3 0 0 3 Chemical15COE03 Biosensors 3 0 0 3 Chemical, ECE & EEE15COE04 Nanocomposites 3 0 0 3 Mech, Chemical & Civil15COE05 Biorefinery 3 0 0 3 Mech & Chemical


DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY

L T P C

13

15HOE01 Principles of Management 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE02 Current Trends in Indian Economy 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE03 Monetary Economics 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE04 Accounting for Managerial Decisions 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE05 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE06 Employability Skills 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE07 English for Academic Purposes 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE08 English for Competitive Exams 3 0 0 3 All Branches15HOE09 Life and Literature 3 0 0 3 All Branches


DEPARTMENT OF HUMANITIES

L T P C

15

15ECM31 - COMPLEX VARIABLES, LINEAR ALGEBRA AND PARTIALDIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Apply complex differentiation concepts to understand and solve electronics and communication problems.CO2 : Apply complex integration concepts to understand and solve electronics and communication problems.CO3 : Apply Linear equations concepts and ideas in modeling and solving Engineering problemsCO4 : Apply Linear algebra concepts and ideas in modeling and solving Engineering problems.CO5 : Apply Partial differential equations concepts and ideas in modeling and solving Engineering problems.

COMPLEX DIFFERENTIATIONAnalytic functions - Definitions and properties - Cauchy Riemann equations in Cartesian and polar coordinates - Construction ofanalytic functions - Conformal mappings -Bilinear Transformation - The mappings of the form w= z+a, az, 1/z, z2, ez, sinz, cosz,-Simple problems. (9)

COMPLEX INTEGRATIONCauchy's integral theorem - Integral formula - Taylor's and Laurent's series (without proof) - Types of singularities, Poles andresidues - Cauchy's residue theorem -Applications - Contour integration using circular and semicircular contours. (9)

LINEAR ALGEBRA-ISystem of Linear equations - Solution of linear system -Linear transformations - Matrix of linear transformation - Matrix operations- Inverse of a matrix - Matrix factorizations - Subspaces of Rn - Dimension and Rank - Determinants - Cramer's rule - Matrixfactorization - Singular value decomposition - Toeplitz matrices. (9)

LINEAR ALGEBRA-IIVector spaces and subspaces - Null spaces and column spaces - Linearly independent sets - Basis - Coordinate systems -Dimension of a vector space - Rank - Eigenvector and Eigenvalues-Characteristic equation- Diagonalization - Eigenvectors andlinear transformations - Orthogonal sets - Gram-Schmidt process- Inner products space. (9)

PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONSFormation by elimination of arbitrary constants and functions - Solution by direct method - Solution of first order non-linear PDE- Standard types - Lagrange linear equation -Linear higher order homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients. (9)

TOTAL : 45+30 = 75

TEXT BOOKS1. Kandasamy, P.et al., "Engineering Mathematics", Volume - II & III S.Chand &Co., 2004.2. Veerarajan.T, "Engineering Mathematics", (for Semester III), (3rd Edition (Fifth Reprint) Tata McGraw - Hill publishing

company Ltd, 2008.3. Venkataraman.M.K, "Engineering Mathematics III", (for B.E., Third Semester), (Revised and Enlarged 14th Edition) The

National Publishing Company, 2008.4. David C Lay, "Linear Algebra and Its Applications", Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2003.5. Gilbert Strang, Linear Algebra and Its Applications," Brooke/Cole Ltd., New Delhi, Fourth Revised Edition, 2012.

L T P C3 2 0 4

16

REFERENCES1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Private Limited., Tenth Edition, 2011.2. Grewal, B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Khanna Publishers, 42nd Edition, 20133. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering", Reprint Khanna Publishers , Ninth Edition, 20134. Jain M.K. Iyengar, S.R.K. & Jain R.K., "Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation", New Age International

(P) Ltd, Sixth edition, 2012.

17

15EC31 - ELECTRON DEVICES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Examine semiconductor diode characteristics and design rectifiers, voltage regulator and wave shaping circuits.CO2 : Categorize semiconductor diodes and identify an appropriate choice for an applicationCO3 : Analyze the characteristics of BJT based on the configuration and categorize the level of impedance and gainCO4 : Determine the FET parameters from the output and transfer characteristicsCO5 : Derive the characteristic equation of solid state devices based on their operation used for high power applications

SEMICONDUCTOR DIODESSemiconductor diode- Resistance levels- Diode equivalent circuits- Transition and Diffusion Capacitance- Reverse recoverytime- Load line Analysis - Half Wave and Full wave Rectifier- Clippers and Clampers- Voltage Multiplier- Zener Diode- Voltageregulator using Zener diode. (10)

SPECIAL TWO TERMINAL DIODESSchottky Barrier diode - Varactor diode - Power diode - Tunnel diode -Photo diodes - Photoconductive cells - IR Emitters - LightEmitting Diode - Liquid crystal Displays - Solar cells - Thermistors. (9)

BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORSTransistor Construction- Transistor operation -Transistor Amplifying action - Common Emitter configuration - Common Baseconfiguration - Common Collector configuration - Comparison of CE, CB and CC configurations - Transistor Switching . (9)

FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORSConstruction and characteristics of JFET - Transfer characteristics - Depletion type MOSFET- Enhancement type MOSFET-VMOS - CMOS (8)

HIGH POWER SOLID STATE DEVICESSCR - DIAC - TRIAC -Unijunction Transistor - Transferred Electron Devices - Gunn Diode - Avalanche Transit time devices -IGBT - Power BJT -Power MOSFET. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Robert L. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky "Electron Devices and Circuits: Theory and Practice", Prentice Hall of India,

10th Edition,2009.2. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Prentice Hall of India, 5th Edition, 2008.

REFERENCES1. Annapurna das and Sisir K. das "Microwave Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2009.2. Millman and Halkias.C., "Integrated Electronics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2010.3. Donald A Neaman, "Semiconductor Physics and Devices", Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition,2012.4. Albert Paul Malvino and David J.Bates, "Electronic Principles", Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition,2007.5. Sedra and Smith, "Microelectronic Circuits", Oxford University Press, 6th Edition, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

18

15EC32 - SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Express continuous time & discrete time signals using standard functions, represent continuous and discrete time

systems and compute the response of LTI systems using linear convolutionCO2 : Use Fourier Transform to analyze and sketch the spectrum of continuous time signals and determine the frequency

response of Linear Time Invariant continuous time systemsCO3 : Use Fourier Transform to analyze and sketch the spectrum of discrete time signals and determine the frequency

response of Linear Time Invariant discrete time systemsCO4 : Illustrate the sampling of low pass signals in time domain and Fourier Transform approachCO5 : Solve difference equations and determine the response of Linear Time Invariant discrete time systems using z

transform

INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMSBasic continuous time signals and discrete time signals - Representation of signals in terms of impulses - Continuous timesystems - Discrete time systems - Properties of systems - Linear Time Invariant systems - Convolution Integral - ConvolutionSum. (12)

FOURIER ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMSContinuous Time Fourier Transform - Properties of Fourier Transform - Response of Continuous time systems to complexexponentials - Continuous time system representation by differential equations - Frequency response of systems characterizedby differential equations. (8)

FOURIER TRANSFORM OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMSIntroduction to Discrete Time Fourier Series - Fourier Transform of Discrete time aperiodic signals - Properties of Discrete TimeFourier Transform - Response of discrete time systems to complex exponentials - Discrete time system representation bydifference equation - Frequency response of systems characterized by difference equations. (8)

SAMPLINGRepresentation of continuous time signals by samples - Sampling theorem for Low pass signals - Band pass signal sampling -Reconstruction from samples using interpolation - Effect of under sampling - Aliasing error. (8)

z TRANSFORMz-Transform and Inverse z-Transform using partial fractions - Sampling rate conversion - Properties of z transform - Analysis andcharacterization of LTI system using z-Transform. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Oppenheim A.V, Willsky A. S and Nawab S. H, "Signals and Systems", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2004.2. Krishnaveni.V and Rajeswari.A, "Signals and Systems", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 1st Edition, 2012.

REFERENCES1. Haykin. S and Barry Van Veen, "Signals and Systems", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2002.2. Hsu.H.P and Rakesh Ranjan, "Signals and Systems", Schaums's Outlines, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2008.

L T P C3 0 0 3

19

3. Samir S. Soliman and Mandyam Dhati Srinath, "Continuous and Discrete Signals and Systems", Prentice-Hall International,2nd Edition, 1998

4. Lathi. B. P, "Linear Systems and Signals", Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2009.5. Ronald E. Ziemer, William H. Transter and Ronald. D. Fanmin, "Signals and Systems - Continuous and Discrete", Pearson

Higher Education, 4th Edition, 1998.

20

15EC33 - DIGITAL CIRCUITS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Determine the simplified Digital Logic Circuits using the Boolean Algebra, Karnaugh Map and Quine Mc-Cluskey

methods and Implementing with Universal GatesCO2 : Design a combinational logic circuit using adders/subtractors, encoders/decoders, multiplexer/demultiplexers and

programmable logic circuits for arithmetic and logical Operation.CO3 : Design a synchronous sequential logic circuits using different flipflops for counters and shift registers.CO4 : Design an asynchronous sequential logic circuits with Race and Hazard free circuits.CO5 : Construct programs for combinational and sequential logic circuit using VHDL code.

INTRODUCTIONReview of Binary Number Systems- Binary codes -Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates -Karnaugh Map - Canonical and standardforms - Product of Sums Simplification - Sum of Products Simplification - Don't care conditions - NAND and NOR implementation- Quine-McCluskey method. (9)

COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGNAdder -Subtractor- BCD adder - Magnitude Comparator -Decoders - Encoders -Code convertors - Multiplexers - Demultiplexers-Design of Combinational Logic Circuits using decoders, multiplexers and demultiplexers - implementation of combinationalcircuits using ROM - PLDs: Programmable Array Logic - Programmable Logic Array. (9)

SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGNFlip-Flops - Types - Master Slave configuration - Characteristic table and equation -Flip Flop excitation tables - Analysis ofclocked sequential circuits : Concepts of state equations: State diagrams, State table, State reduction, State Assignment -Mealy/Moore models - Design of synchronous sequential circuits- Shift registers -Universal Shift registers-Binary Counter- RingCounter - Johnson's Counter - Modulo-N counters. (9)

ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGNBlock diagram -Analysis and Procedure-Circuit with Latch-Design Procedure-Reduction of state and flow table-Hazards. (9)

VHDLIntroduction to Hardware Description Language and VHDL - Design flow - Entity, architecture, process, configuration and packagedeclarations - Signals and data types - Operators and expressions - Concurrent and sequential statements - Behavioral modeling-Data flow modeling -structural modeling - VHDL code for Combinational circuits, Flip Flops, Registers and Counters. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. M. Morris Mano, "Digital Design", Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2013.2. Stephen Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, "Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.

Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2012.

REFERENCES1. Tocci R J and Widmer N S, "Digital Systems - Principles and Applications", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,11th Edition,

2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

21

2. Charles H Roth, "Fundamentals of Logic Design", Thomas Publication Company, 7th Edition, 2011.3. J.Basker, "A VHDL Primer", Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2006.4. John.F.Wakerly,"Digital Design Principles and Practices", Pearson Education,4th Edition, 2006.5. Roger Tokhiem, "Schaum's Outline of Digital Principles", McGraw Hill publication,3rd Edition, 1994.

22

15EC34 - NETWORKS AND TRANSMISSION LINES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Derive the two port network parameters and analyze the characteristics of symmetrical and asymmetrical networksCO2 : Derive equations and design m-derived and constant-k filter to meet the given frequency and impedance specificationsCO3 : Design attenuators to meet the given requirements and Derive design equations for T or Pi or Bridge-T type equalizersCO4 : Interpret the physical significance of general solution of Transmission line using voltage and current expressions

and Compute input reflection coefficient and input impedance for a given set of line parametersCO5 : Design a single or double stub matching network to meet given impedance matching requirements

TWO PORT NETWORKS AND NETWORK PARAMETERSFunctional classification of Networks - Two Port Network parameters - Impedance - Admittance - ABCD & Hybrid parameters -Interconnection of Two Port Networks: Series, Parallel, Cascade - characteristics of Symmetrical and Asymmetrical networks -Half section networks. (9)

FILTERSApplication of filters in communication systems - Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band stop Filters - m-derived andConstant- k filter design - T and Pi sections - Filter Characteristics- Composite filters. (9

ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERSAttenuators : T-type, Pi Type, Bridged T, L-Type attenuators - Equalizers - Inverse Networks- Series Equalizer - Full SeriesEqualizer - Shunt Equalizer - Full Shunt Equalizer - Constant Resistant Equalizer - Bridged-T Attenuation Equalizer - Bridged-TPhase Equalizer. (9)

TRANSMISSION LINE THEORYTransmission line as a cascade of T-Sections - General Solution of the transmission line - Voltage and Current of a line - Infiniteline - Input impedance - Reflection coefficient - Wavelength and velocity of propagation - Waveform distortion - Distortion lesstransmission line - Input impedance of lossless lines - Reflection - Transfer impedance - Reflection factor and reflection loss .

(9)THE LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCIESStanding waves and standing wave ratio on a line - One eighth wave line - Quarter wave line and impedance matching - Circlediagram for the dissipation-less line - Smith Chart - Application of the Smith Chart - Conversion from impedance to reflectioncoefficient - Impedance to Admittance conversion - Input impedance of a lossless line terminated by impedance - Single stubmatching and double stub matching. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. John.D.Ryder,"Networks, Lines and Fields", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 1997.2. Sudhakar.A, Shyammohan S.P, "Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,

2015.

L T P C3 0 0 3

23

REFERENCES1. Hayt, Kemmerly and Durbin, "Engineering Circuit Analysis" McGrawHill Education, 8th Edition, 2012.2. F.F.Kuo, "Network Analysis and Synthesis", Wiley India, 2nd Edition, 2005.3. Umesh Sinha, "Transmission lines and Networks", Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 8th edition, 2003.4. D. Roy Choudhury,"Networks and Systems", New Age International (P) Ltd., 1st edition, 1988.5. R K Shevgaonkar, "Electromagnetic Waves", Tata McGraw Hill, 1st edition, 2005.

24

15EC35 - C PROGRAMMING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Draw flowcharts for the given problem using top down strategy and illustrate data types, operators, and I/O functions

for writing C programsCO2 : Write C programs using conditional and looping statements and interpret resultsCO3 : Write C Programs using arrays, pointers and standard string library functions and interpret resultsCO4 : Write C Programs using functions and appropriate selection of its prototypeCO5 : Develop C Programs using structures, union & files and interpret results

INTRODUCTION TO C PROGRAMMINGFundamentals of programming - Flowcharts- Programming strategies: top- down, Structured programming, object oriented - Cdata types - C compilation and execution - Operators- Hierarchy of operators - Associativity of operators - Expressions - Singledimensional arrays - Console I/O Functions- Formatted I/O:Scanf, Printf,getchar, putchar. (9)

CONTROL STATEMENTSIf statements, if-else statement, nested if statements - Ternary operators - while loop, do-while loop, for loop- break statement-continue statement- switch case statement - Goto statement and statement labels. (9)

ARRAYS AND POINTERSArrays - Multidimensional arrays - Strings - Standard string library functions strlen(), strcpy(), strcat(), strstr() and strcmp() -Pointers- Dynamic memory allocation and deallocation. (9)

FUNCTIONFunction declaration and prototypes - Parameter passing recursion- Command line arguments- Function pointers- Passingpointers to functions - Passing arrays to functions- Passing function to other functions. Storage classes - C preprocessor. (9)

STRUCTURES AND FILESDefinition of structure - Array of structures - Pointer to structures- Self referential structures - Union- Bit fields- typedef - enumdata type- High level file I/O-text and binary file processing-low level file IO and pre-processing. (9)

TOTAL : 45+30=75

TEXT BOOKS1. Byron S.Gottfried and Jitender Kumar Chhabra, "Programming with C",Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 3rd Edition,

New Delhi,2011.2. Brian W.Kernigham and Dennis M.Ritchie, "C programming Language(ANSI C)", Prentice Hall of India Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES1. Herbert Schildt,"C-The Complete Reference",Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 4th Edition, New Delhi 2010.2. PradipDey and ManasGhosh,"Programming in C",Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.3. Deitel and Deitel, "C How to Program", Pearson Education, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2011.4. E. Balaguruswamy, "Programming in ANSI C", Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, New Delhi,2006.5. Yuksel Uckan, "Problem solving using C", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,1999.

L T P C3 2 0 4

25

15EC36 - CIRCUITS AND ELECTRON DEVICES LABORATORY

ASSESSMENT : PRACTICAL

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Examine the network theorems for the given electronic circuit to test the faults in the circuits and calculate the

resistance, knee voltage and breakdown voltage under forward and reverse bias conditions using the semiconductorcharacteristics

CO2 : Construct wave shaping and rectifier circuits using semiconductor diodes for evaluating ripple factor and determinetransistor parameters from the input & output characteristics of BJT & FET and model the hybrid equivalent circuit

CO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in teams

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Verification of Kirchhoff's current law and voltage law• Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems• Verification of Thevenin's and Maximum power transfer theorems• Characteristics of Silicon and Germanium diodes• Characteristics of Zener diodes• Design and testing of Clippers and Clampers• Design and testing of Half wave rectifier using diodes• Design and testing of Full wave rectifier using diodes• Input and output characteristics of BJT• Transfer characteristics of FET• Characteristics of UJT• Design of UJT Relaxation Oscillator

The above experiments are simulated using pspice

REFERENCES1. Circuits and Electron Devices, Laboratory Manual prepared by ECE Department, CIT.2. M. H. Rashid, "Introduction to PSPICE using ORCAD for Circuits and Electronics", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Limited,

3rd edition, 2005

L T P C0 0 2 1

26

15EC37 - DIGITAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Design, Construct and Simulate combinational logic circuit using Digital IC's and VHDLCO2 : Design, Construct and Simulate Sequential logic circuit using Digital IC's and VHDLCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Verification of DeMorgans theorem using logic gates• Simplification of Boolean expression using Karnaugh map and Quine McCluskey Methods• Design and Implementation of adder and subtractor using logic gates• Design and Implementation of 4 bit binary adder, subtractor and BCD adder• Design and Implementation of code converters• Design and implementation of magnitude comparator• Design and Implementation of 3 bit odd/even parity generator/checker• Design and Implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer Circuits• Design and Implementation of Encoders and Decoders• Design and Implementation of 4 bit counters.The above experiments are simulated using VHDL

REFERENCES1. Digital Circuits Laboratory Manual prepared by ECE Department, CIT.2. Stephen D. M. Brown, Zvonko G. Vranesic," Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design", Tata McGraw Hill Education

Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2012

L T P C0 0 2 1

27

15HSS01 - SCIENCE OF CREATIVITY AND PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEStudents will be able to,CO1 : Describe the principles of karma yoga and functioning of mind and consciousness.CO2 : Hypothesize the evolution of Universe and living beings in a global and societal contextCO3 : Infer the principles of Yoga to practice it and know the value of health.CO4 : Interpret the philosophy of introspection procedures for better livingCO5 : Assess, take personal responsibility and follow professional ethics for sustained growth in career and life.

LIFE FORCE, MIND AND CONCIOUSNESSScience of Creativity and Personality Development – Objectives - Principles of Karma Yoga – Duty Consciousness – Communismand Capitalism – Law of Nature - Life Force – Origin – Potentiality of the Life Force - Premordial State – Wave Theory –Consciousness - Pancha Thanmatras – Secret of Revelations – Mind - Biomagnetism – Physical Transformation of Biomagnetism.

(7)

EVOLUTION OF THE UNIVERSE AND LIVING BEINGSEvolution of the Universe: Creation Theory – Evolution Theory – Theory of Permanence – Theory of Mithya – Evolution of LivingBeings: Absolute Space and Force - Plants Experience Pain – Two Eyes and Two Ears – Seven Constituent Layers in the Body.

(5)

YOGA AND ITS BENEFITSSimple and Safe Yoga – Upa Yoga Practices: Yoga for Peace – Yoga for Health - Yoga for Joy – Yoga for Love – Yoga for Well-being - Yoga for Success. Physical Exercise - Meditation – Seven Centers of Meditation – Benefits - Effect of Good Vibrations -Cause and Effect System -Food and Health. (6)

INTROSPECTIONAttachment, Detachment and Moderation in Enjoyment - Imaginary Expectations - Harmony in Life: Self, Family, Society andNature – Introspection: Analysis of Thought, Moralization of Desire, Neutralization of Anger, Eradication of Worries and SelfRealization. (6)

HUMAN VALUESMorals, Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethics - Service Learning – Virtues – Respect for Others – Living Peacefully –Caring – Sharing - Honesty – Courage – Valuing Time – Co-operation - Commitment – Empathy – Self Confidence – Challengesin Work Place – Impact of cyberspace on individuals. (6)

TOTAL: 15 + 15 = 30

TEXT BOOKS1. Yogiraj Vethathri Maharishi, “Karma Yoga – The Holistic Unity”, Vethathri Publications, IV Edition, 2009. (Chapters 1-7,

10-12)2. R.S.Naagarazan, “A Text book on Professional Ethics and Human Values”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,

2011.

L T P C1 0 0 1

28

REFERENCES1. Sadhguru, “Body the Greatest Gadget and Mind is your Business”, Diamond Pocket Books Pvt. Ltd, Isha Foundations,

2013.2. Swami Vivekananda and Swami Nikhilananda, “Karma Yoga and Bhakti Yoga”, II Edition, Ramakrishna Vivekananda

Publications, 2008.3. Henry Dreyfuss, “The Measure of Man and Woman: Human Factors in Design”, John Wiley and Sons Publications, 2012.4. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger,”Ethics in Engineering”, IV Edition, McGraw Hill, NewYork, 2005.5. M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan, V.S. Senthilkumar, “Engineering Ethics”, I Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.

29

15ECM41 - PROBABILITY AND RANDOM PROCESS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Determine probability, conditional probability and combinatorial probability of events.CO2 : Compute the probability mass function and probability density function of discrete and continuous random variables.CO3 : Compute the joint distribution and moments of random variables by using their probability mass functions and

probability density functions.CO4 : Determine random sequences by using limit theorems on random variables.CO5 : Evaluate the Power Spectral Density of various stationary random processes

INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITYSets and set operations - Probability space - Conditional probability and Bayes theorem - Combinatorial probability and samplingmodels. (9)

RANDOM VARIABLESDiscrete random variables, probability mass function, probability distribution function, example random variables and distributions;Continuous random variables, probability density function, probability distribution function, example distributions. (9)

MOMENTS AND PROBABILITY DENSITY FUNCTIONJoint distributions, functions of one and two random variables, moments of random variables; Conditional distribution, densitiesand moments; Characteristic functions of a random variable; Markov, Chebyshev and Chernoff bounds. (9)

RANDOM SEQUENCESRandom sequences and modes of convergence (everywhere, almost everywhere, probability, distribution and mean square);Limit theorems; Strong and weak laws of large numbers, central limit theorem. (9)

RANDOM PROCESSStationary processes-Mean and covariance functions - Ergodicity -Transmission of random process through LTI-Power spectraldensity - Classification of Random Processes - Wide-Sense Stationary Processes and LSI Systems - Periodic and CyclostationaryProcesses - Vector Processes and State Equations. (9)

TOTAL : 45+30=75

TEXT BOOKS1. H. Stark and J. Woods, "Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing", 3rd Edition, Pearson

Education,2006.2. Papoulis and S. Unnikrishnan Pillai, "Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes", 4th Edition, McGraw

Hill,2006.

REFERENCES1. K. L. Chung, "Elementary Probability Theory with Stochastic Processes", 4th Edition, Springer International,2010.2. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, "Introduction to Probability", UBS Publishers.3. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, "Introduction to Stochastic Processes", UBS Publishers.4. Sheldon.M.Ross, "Introduction to Stochastic Models", Harcourt Asia, Academic Press, 11th Edition, 2013.5. Scott L.Miller, DonaldG.Childers, "Probability and Random Processes", 2nd Edition, Elsevier, 2012

L T P C3 2 0 4

30

15EC41 - ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Calculate the stability factors for the various types of biasing circuits using different transistor configurations.CO2 : Design the small signal hybrid model of various configurations of BJT and calculate the gain and bandwidth from the

frequency response analysis of single stage and multi stage amplifiersCO3 : Construct and design FET biasing circuits for different configurations.CO4 : Design the small signal hybrid model of various configurations of FET and calculate the gain and bandwidth from the

frequency response analysis of single stage FET amplifiersCO5 : Construct the different classes of large signal amplifiers to calculate their efficiencies & design and compare the

amplifiers with and without feedback using BJT and FET

BJT BIASINGNeed for biasing - DC load line analysis of biasing circuits - Operating point- Design of biasing circuits: Fixed bias configuration,Emitter bias configuration, Voltage divider bias configuration- Emitter follower configuration - Common base configuration - Biasstabilization - Stability factors. (12)

BJT AMPLIFIERSAC load line -Transistor hybrid equivalent model -Common Emitter circuit analysis - CE with unbypassed RE -Comparison ofCE,CB,CC circuits-Low & High Frequency response of CE amplifier-Capacitor coupled two stage CE amplifier-Direct coupledtwo stage circuits-Two stage circuit with emitter follower output-Cascode amplifiers. (12)

FET BIASINGCommon source configuration - Fixed bias configuration - Self bias configuration - Voltage divider biasing - Common gateconfiguration - Depletion type MOSFETs - Enhancement type MOSFETs- Design of biasing circuits. (12)

FET AMPLIFIERSAC load line -FET AC equivalent circuit - Common Source circuit analysis- CS with unbypassed RS - Comparison of CS, CD, CGcircuits- Low & High Frequency response of CS amplifier. (10)

LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERSLarge signal amplifiers using BJT: Transformer coupled class A, class B and class AB power amplifier- Transformer coupledamplifier design - Class C amplifier Feedback concepts - Feedback connection types - Practical feedback circuits - Currentseries and Current shunt feedback using BJTs - Voltage series and Voltage shunt feedback using FET. (14)

TOTAL : 60

TEXT BOOKS1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky "Electron Devices and Circuits: Theory and Practice", Prentice Hall of India, 10th

Edition, 2009.2. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Prentice Hall of India, 5th Edition, 2008.

REFERENCES1. Millman and Halkias.C,"Integrated Electronics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2010.2. Millman. J and Taub H, "Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms'', Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2011.

L T P C4 0 0 4

31

3. S.Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill ltd., 2nd Edition, 2009.4. Thomas.L.Floyd, "Electronic Devices: Conventional Current version", Pearson, 9th Edition, 2015.5. B. Visvesvara Rao, K.Raja Rajeswari, P.Chalam Raju Pantulu and K.Bhaskara Rama, "Electronic Circuit Analysis", Pearson,

1st Edition, 2012.

32

15EC42 - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : analyze differential amplifiers and constant current sources, analyze the characteristics of operational amplifier to

choose suitable operational amplifier for an applicationCO2 : develop operational amplifier circuits for linear, nonlinear and open loop applicationsCO3 : analyze and design filters & oscillator circuits using operational amplifierCO4 : analyze and design multivibrators and data converters using linear ICs for an applicationCO5 : apply the concepts of PLL to design frequency multiplier/divider, FSK demodulator and design voltage regulators

using ICs

INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERSDifferential amplifier - differential amplifier with constant current source - current mirror - Widlar current source- Building blocksof operational amplifier-I/O stages, gain stage and level translator stage of op-amp - Characteristics of an Ideal OperationalAmplifier-Op-amp parameters & characteristics- frequency response - stability - frequency compensation. (9)

OP-AMP APPLICATIONSLinear applications: voltage follower - inverting, non inverting amplifiers-summing, scaling, averaging amplifiers-instrumentationamplifiers-difference amplifier-integrator-differentiator. Nonlinear applications: Precision half wave & full wave rectifiers- peakdetector-sample & hold circuit-log & anti-log amplifiers Open loop applications: Comparator-zero crossing detector- Schmitttrigger-voltage limiters-window detectors. (9)

ACTIVE FILTERS AND OSCILLATORSActive filters - Sallen-Key filter structure- Design of Butterworth filters: Low pass filter- High pass filter- Band pass filter- Bandreject filter - All pass filters - Switched capacitor filters-Design of Oscillators: RC phase shift oscillator- Wien bridge oscillator- LCOscillators: Hartley oscillator - Colpitts oscillator - Clapp oscillator- Crystal oscillator. (9)

MULTIVIBRATORS AND DATA CONVERTERSDesign of Astable Multivibrator & Monostable Multivibrator using Op.Amp -Triangular wave generator-Saw tooth wave generator- IC 555 timer: Functional block diagram and description of Astable & Monostable multivibrators using IC555 - Digital to Analogconverters: Binary Weighted Network - R-2R Ladder Network- inverted R-2R ladder network - Analog to Digital converters:Successive Approximation - Counter Type - Dual slope - Flash type converters. (9)

PLL AND VOLTAGE REGULATORSPhased Locked Loop: operating principles-Basic building blocks - Applications: Frequency multiplier/divider - Frequency translator- Frequency synthesizer - FM demodulator - FSK demodulator - PLL IC - Voltage regulators: Fixed voltage regulator-Adjustablevoltage regulator - Dual tracking regulator - Switching regulator: self oscillating type switching regulator - IC voltage regulators.

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Gayakwad Ramakant A, "Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits" Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 4th Edition, New

Delhi, 2009.2. Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain "Linear Integrated Circuits", New Age International Private Limited, 3rd Edition, New Delhi,

2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

33

REFERENCES1. Sergio Franco, "Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits", Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2007.2. K.R.Botkar, "Integrated Circuits", Khanna Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2003.3. B.Somanathan Nair, "Linear Integrated Circuits, Analysis, Design and Applications", Wiley India Publishers, 1st Edition,

2009.4. Ron Mancini, "OP AMPs for Everyone", Newnes, An Imprint of Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2003.5. S.Salivahanan and V.S. Kanchana Bhaaskaran, "Linear Integrated Circuits", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company Ltd, 1st

Edition, 2008

34

15EC43 - PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Illustrate DSB-SC, SSB-SC, VSB amplitude modulation techniques and their spectrum and explain the function of

linear and non-linear AM modulatorsCO2 : Illustrate angle modulation techniques and their spectrum and explain the functional blocks of FM transmitterCO3 : Compare and distinguish the performance of AM & FM receivers in their operation, characteristics and receiver

parametersCO4 : Describe the of pulse analog modulation & pulse digital modulation techniquesCO5 : Express narrow band noise using I & Q components & estimate the performance of AM, FM, PCM systems using

Figure Merit.

AMPLITUDE MODULATIONElements of Communication System - Communication Channels - Need for Modulation - Amplitude Modulation - Linear ModulationSchemes: DSB-SC Modulation - SSB Modulation - VSB Modulation - Frequency Spectrum of AM signals, DSB-SC, SSB-SC -AM modulators: Power law modulator - Switching Modulator - Balanced Modulator - Ring Modulator- AM Transmitters. (9)

ANGLE MODULATIONPhase Modulation - Frequency Modulation - Narrow Band FM - Wide Band FM - Frequency Spectrum of FM - TransmissionBandwidth of FM Signals - Direct FM generation: Varactor diode modulator, Reactance Modulator - Narrowband FM generation- Indirect FM generation - FM Transmitters. (9)

AM & FM RECEIVERSAM Demodulators: Envelope detector, Coherent Detection of DSB-SC, SSB-SC - Costas Receiver - Frequency Translation -Multiplexing: Frequency Division Multiplexing, Quadrature Carrier Multiplexing- AM Receivers: Superheterodyne.FM Demodulators: Slope detector, Balanced Slope Detector, Foster Seeley Discriminator, Ratio Detector, PLL Demodulator,Quadrature FM Demodulator - FM Receivers. (9)

PULSE MODULATIONSampling Process - Pulse Amplitude Modulation - Pulse Width Modulation - Pulse Position Modulation - Bandwidth - NoiseTrade-off - Quantization Process - Pulse Code Modulation - Time Division Multiplexing - Digital Multiplexers - Delta Modulation- Delta Sigma Modulation - Linear Prediction - Differential Pulse Code Modulation - Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation.

(9)NOISE IN CW AND PULSE MODULATION SYSTEMSNoise - Narrow Band Noise - Representation of Narrow Band Noise: In-phase & Quadrature Components, Envelope & PhaseComponents - Sine Wave Plus Narrowband Noise - Receiver Model - Noise in DSB-SC Receivers, SSB receivers, AM receiversusing Envelop Detection, FM Receivers, Pre-Emphasis and De-Emphasis in FM, Noise consideration in Pulse-Code Modulationand Delta Modulation Systems. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Simon Haykin, "Communication Systems", John Wiley & Sons, 4th Edition, 2004.2. Herbert Taub and Donald L. Schilling, "Principles of communication", McGraw Hill International student Edition, 3rd Edition,

2008.

L T P C3 0 0 3

35

REFERENCES1. Wayne Tomasi, "Electronic Communication Systems: Fundamentals Through Advanced", Pearson Education, 5th Edition,

2009.2. John G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi,"Fundamentals of Communication Systems",Pearson Education, LPE, 2005.3. Kennedy G, "Electronic Communication Systems", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 1999.4. Lathi. B. P, "Communication Systems", BS Publications, 4th Edition, 2004.5. Hwei P. Hsu,"Schaum's Outlines of Analog and Digital Communication", McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003.

36

15EC44 - ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND WAVEGUIDES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the concepts of Electrostatic fields with the help of mathematics and apply them for practical applicationsCO2 : Describe the concepts of static Magnetic fields with the help of mathematics and apply them for practical engineering

problems such as magnetic levitationCO3 : Interpret Maxwell's equations for time varying Electromagnetic fields, determine its parameters for different media,

distinguish various polarizations of plane waves and evaluate reflection and transmission coefficientsCO4 : Formulate general solutions for TE, TM & TEM modes of parallel plate and Rectangular waveguides and determine

parameters such as frequency, phase constant, velocity, attenuation and associated characteristic impedance forthe waveguides.

CO5 : Formulate general solutions for TE, TM & TEM modes of Circular waveguide and determine parameters such asfrequency, phase constant, velocity, attenuation and associated characteristic impedance for the waveguide and Qfactor of Rectangular Cavity Resonators

ELECTROSTATIC FIELDSFundamentals of vector calculus-Introduction to three co-ordinate systems - Introduction to electrostatic fields - Coulomb's Lawand field intensity - Electric Field due to continuous charge distributions - Electric flux density - Gauss's law- Maxwell's equation- Application of Gauss's law - Electric potential - Relationship between E and V-Flux lines- Energy density - Conductors -Boundary conditions in electrostatic fields - Capacitance of parallel plate-Capacitance of Coaxial cable - Laplace and Poisson'sequations-Application Note: Capacitance of Microstrip lines. (10)

MAGNETIC FIELDSBiot-Savart's Law - Ampere's circuital law - Applications - Magnetic flux density and Maxwell's equations - Magnetic -Scalar andVector potential - Magnetic Torque and Moment - Magnetic Boundary conditions -Magnetic energy - Inductors and Inductances- Energy stored in magnetic field - Energy density- Application Note : Magnetic Levitation (9)

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVESMaxwell's equation - Equation of continuity - Inconsistency of Ampere's law - Wave motion in free space -Uniform plane waves- wave equation for conducting medium - Sinusoidal time variations - Conductors and Dielectrics - Polarization - Reflection by aperfect conductor -Normal and Oblique incidence - Reflection by a Dielectric- Normal and Oblique incidence - Poynting Vectorand Theorem (9)

WAVES AND RECTANGULAR GUIDESWaves between parallel planes - Transverse Electric waves - Transverse Magnetic waves -characteristics of TM and TE waves- Transverse Electromagnetic waves - Velocities of propagation - Attenuation for TM,TE and TEM waves -Wave impedances.Rectangular guides:Transverse Electric waves in Rectangular guides-Transverse Magnetic waves in Rectangular guides -Impossibility of TEM waves in waveguide (9)

CIRCULAR GUIDES AND CAVITY RESONATORSCircular guide: Transverse Electric waves and Transverse Magnetic waves in circular guides - Excitation of various modes -Wave impedances and characteristic impedances - Cavity Resonators - Rectangular cavity resonators - Q factor of rectangularcavity resonator for TE101 mode. (8)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

37

TEXT BOOKS1. Mathew.N.O.Sadiku,S.V.Kulkarni, "Elements of Electromagnetics", Oxford University press, 6th Edition, 2015.2. Edward.C.Jordan & Keith.G.Balmain,, "Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,

2006.

REFERENCES1. William H.Hayt, "Engineering Electromagnetics",Tata McGraw-Hill, 8th Edition, 2012.2. Joseph A.Edminister, "Schaum's Outline of Electromagnetics", Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2010.3. David K.Cheng , "Field and Wave Electromagnetics", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2007.4. Umesh Sinha, "Electromagnetic Theory and its Applications", Satya Prakashan,1996.5. Gangadhar.K.A, "Field Theory" Khanna Publishers, 15th Edition, 2002.

38

15EC45 - COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND MICROPROCESSOR

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the concepts of organization, CPU architecture, Instruction set, data path and control unit of a ComputerCO2 : Examine 8086 microprocessor architecture and system configuration for integrating with external memory and I/O

devices.CO3 : Develop assembly language programs using the addressing modes and instruction set of 8086 microprocessor.CO4 : Exemplify the functions of memory sub systems to integrate with CPU.CO5 : Illustrate the methodologies for interfacing I/O devices and the concepts of parallelism and concurrency in computers.

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONAL UNITSBasic Computer Organization- CPU Architecture and Instruction set Principles- Fixed Point Data Path- Floating Point Data Path-Control Unit Design: Hardwired Control - Micro programmed Control. (9)

8086 MICROPROCESSOR8086 Microprocessor Architecture- External Memory addressing - Bus cycles- Minimum/Maximum mode System Configuration- Interrupt processing. (9)

ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMINGAddressing modes - Assembler Directives - Instruction set - Stack -Procedures - Macros - Simple Assembly LanguageProgramming. (9)

MEMORY ORGANIZATIONMemory Parameters -Classification of Memory - ROM &RAM subsystem design- Memory Allocation - Cache and Virtual Memory- Associative Memory. (9)

SYSTEM ORGANIZATIONAccessing I/O devices - Interrupt Handling - Bus Arbitration Techniques-Bus concepts-Interface circuits and I/O Controllers-Parallelism & Pipelining- Concept of Superscalar architecture- Vector Computing and Array Processing. (9)

TOTAL : 45 + 30 = 75

TEXT BOOKS1. B.Govindarajalu, "Computer architecture and Organisation: Design principles and Applications", Tata McGraw Hill Education,

2nd Edition, 2010.2. Krishna Kant, "Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and System Design using 8085, 8086,

8051, 8096", Prentice Hall of India, 1st Edition, 2011.

REFERENCES1. Soumitra Kumar Mandal "Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture Programming and Interfacing using 8085

8086 & 8051" Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 1st Edition, 2011.2. U.S.Shah, "Microprocessor & Application", Macmillan Publishers India Limited, 2nd Edition, 2011.3. John P.Hayes, "Computer architecture and Organization", Tata McGraw - Hill, 3rd Edition, 2012.4. William Stallings, "Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance", Prentice Hall, 9th Edition, 2012.5. P.Pal Chaudhuri, "Computer organization and design", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2008.

L T P C3 2 0 4

39

15EC46 - ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Design and test the different types of biasing circuits for given specifications and calculate the stability factors &

analyze the frequency response of different types of single stage BJT amplifiers and calculate the gain and bandwidthCO2 : Design and test multistage amplifiers, power amplifiers and feedback amplifiers using electronic components and

determine the parameters from the frequency response analysis of amplifiersCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Design and testing of self bias and fixed bias circuits using BJT• Design and testing of voltage divider bias circuits using BJT and FET• Design and testing of Common Emitter amplifier• Design and testing of Common Base amplifier• Design and testing of Emitter follower and Bootstrap amplifiers• Design and testing of RC coupled Cascade amplifiers• Design and testing of Direct coupled and Transformer coupled Cascade amplifiers• Design and testing of Cascodeamplifiers• Design and testing Class A amplifier• Design and testing of Class B Push pull Power amplifier• Design and testing of Voltage series and Voltage shunt Feedback amplifiers using FET• Design and testing of Current series and Current shunt Feedback amplifiers using BJT

The above experiments are simulated using PSPICE.

REFERENCES1. Electronic circuits Laboratory Manual prepared by ECE Department, CIT.2. M. H. Rashid, "Introduction to PSPICE using ORCAD for Circuits and Electronics", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Limited, 3rd

Edition, 2005.

L T P C0 0 2 1

40

15EC47 - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Test and analyze the characteristics of operational amplifier and special purpose integrated circuitsCO2 : Design, simulate and test active filters, oscillators, multivibrators, comparators, Schmitt Trigger, data converters,

PLL based frequency multiplier and voltage regulatorsCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Operational Amplifier Characteristics• Operational Amplifier Applications• Design and testing of Active Filters• Design and testing of Oscillators & Multivibrators• Design and testing of Comparator & Schmitt Trigger• Design and testing of D/A & A/D Convertors• Design and testing of Multivibrators using Timer IC• PLL Characteristics and applications• Design of voltage regulators using IC

REFERENCES1. Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory Manual of ECE Department, CIT.2. David A.Bell, "Laboratory Manual for Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs", Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2006.

L T P C0 0 2 1

41

15EC51 - DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Develop and Illustrate frame transmission for a given scenario. Estimate utilization percentage of data links in

networks.Outline the concepts of computer networks, its layered architecture, and switching mechanisms.CO2 : Evaluate throughput at MAC layer level. Analyze adaptability of given data for a given LAN standard. Categorize

given address into one of standard addressing techniques and schemes.CO3 : Design subnet masks, sub-blocks addressing scheme and identify routing mechanisms to fulfill networking

requirements.CO4 : Analyze given Transport layer header and extract its field data. Describe the essential principles of transport layer

protocols. Identify the key factors to improve the performance and QoS parameters of data communication networks.CO5 : Describe the features and operations of various application layer protocols like TELNET,SMTP, FTP, HTTP, SNMP.

NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND DATA LINK LAYERIntroduction: Building blocks - links, nodes - layering and protocols - OSI architecture - Internet architecture - Circuit switching vsPacket switching - Datagram Networks - TCP/IP reference model - Logical link control functions - Framing - Stop and Waitprotocol for Noisy and Noiseless channels - Go-back-N protocol for Noisy channel - Selective repeat protocol for Noisy channel.

(9)MEDIUM ACCESS SUBLAYERMedium Access layer: Random access - Controlled access - Wired LAN - IEEE 802.3: Standard Ethernet, IEEE 802.4: TokenRing - IEEE 802.5: Token Bus - Connecting devices: Repeaters, Hubs, Switches and Gateways - Virtual LANs. (9)

NETWORK LAYER PROTOCOLS & ROUTING TECHNIQUESAddressing -Logical - Physical address Mapping - IPv4 - IPv6 - Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) - Reverse Address ResolutionProtocol (RARP) - Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) - Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) - Forwarding andRouting techniques - Optimization - Distance Vector Routing - Link State Routing. (9)

TRANSPORT LAYER PROTOCOLS, CONGESTION CONTROL & QoSProcess-to-process delivery - User Datagram Protocol (UDP) - Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) : Segments, Connectionestablishment, data transfer, termination , Flow Control, Error Control,Congestion control - Stream Control Transmission Protocol(SCTP) - QoS - Flow classes - Queuing : FIFO, Priority and Weighted Fair Queuing - Traffic shaping: Leaky bucket and TokenBucket. (9)

UPPER OSI LAYERSTeletype Network (TELNET) - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) - File Transfer Protocol (FTP) - Hyper Text Transfer Protocol(HTTP) - Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): SNMP Management Components, Structure, Information Base - Overviewof Software Defined Networking (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Behrouz.A. Forouzan, "Data Communication and Networking", Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.

L T P C3 0 0 3

42

REFERENCES1. Stallings.W, "Data and Computer Communication", Pearson Education, 10th Edition, 2013.2. J.F.Kurkose & K.W.Rose,"Computer Networking-A top down approach", Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2017.3. Ed Tittle," Schaum's outlines - Computer Networking", McGraw Hill Professional, 2002.4. Srinivasan Keshav, "An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking", Addision Wesley Professional, 2010.5. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, David Wetherall, "Computer Networks", Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2013.

43

15EC52 - MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Interpret the architecture & instruction set of 8051 microcontroller to develop assembly language programsCO2 : Illustrate the application of 8051 microcontroller on chip peripherals to implement the functions of I/O port, timer/

Counter, serial port & interrupts.CO3 : Exemplify the peripheral devices 8255 PPI and 8279 for integrating keyboard, 7 segment display, LCD display and

traffic light controller & 8259 PIC for handling multiple interrupts I/OCO4 : Integrate memory modules and the I/O devices ADC, DAC, Sensor & RTC with 8051 microcontroller for an application

and develop assembly language programsCO5 : Design 8051 Microcontroller based systems for measuring electrical and physical quantities & Motor control, Develop

Embedded C program for an application by using Arduino board

8051 MICROCONTROLLERArchitecture of 8051 - Special Function Registers - I/O Pins, Ports and Circuits - Instruction Set - Addressing Modes - Assemblylanguage Programming. (9)

ON-CHIP PERIPHERALSI/O Port Programming - Timer Registers -Timer Modes - Overflow Flags - Clocking Sources -Timer/ Counter Interrupts - TimerProgramming - Baud Rate Generation - Serial Port Register -Modes of Operation - Serial Port Programming- Interrupt Organization- Processing Interrupts - Interrupt Programming (9)

PERIPHERAL DEVICESProgrammable Peripheral Interface (8255) - Keyboard / Display Controller (8279) - Programmable Interrupt Controller (8259) -Case Studies: Traffic Light Control - Interfacing Keyboard, Seven Segment and LCD display - Multiple Interrupt requests. (9)

INTERFACING MEMORY AND I/O DEVICES WITH 8051Microcontroller Specification - External Memory Interface - Interfacing with MAX232 chip for RS232C Communication - ADC andDAC Interface - Interfacing Relay and Sensors - RTC Interfacing. (9)

DESIGN OF MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEMVoltage , Current and Frequency Measurement - DC Motor Control - Stepper Motor control - Case Studies: Arduino BoardOverview - Arduino IDE - Temperature Control. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinley, "The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems

Using Assembly and C ", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education 2013.2. Kenneth J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller. Architecture, Programming and Applications", 3rd Edition, West publishing

company 2014

REFERENCES1. Krishna Kant, "Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and System Design using 8085, 8086,

8051, 8096", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2014.

L T P C3 0 0 3

44

2. Soumitra Kumar Mandal "Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture Programming and Interfacing using 80858086 & 8051" Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 1st Edition, 2011.

3. Myke Predko, "Programming and Customizing the 8051 Microcontroller", 1st Edition, 2012.4. Chris Braith, "8051 Microcontroller Application based Introduction", Elsevier 2004.5. Manish K Patel, "The 8051 Microcontroller Based Embedded Systems "Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, Ist Edition,

2014.

45

15EC53 - DISCRETE TIME SIGNAL PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Compute the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of a given discrete time sequence using Radix-2 Fast Fourier Transform

algorithms and to compute the linear convolution of discrete time sequences using DFT.CO2 : Design Linear phase low pass and high pass FIR digital filters using windowing & frequency sampling methods and

realize FIR systems using linear phase structures.CO3 : Design IIR Butterworth and Chebyshev type I low pass and high pass digital filters for given specifications and

realize IIR systems using direct, cascade and parallel form structures.CO4 : Explain the effects of quantization error in digital filters and illustrate decimation and interpolation on discrete time

sequences.CO5 : Explain the architecture, addressing modes and instruction sets of DSP processor.

DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORMReview of sampling, Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) & z Transform, Frequency Domain Sampling and Reconstructionof Discrete Time Signals - Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT) - Properties of the DFT - Use of DFT in Linear Filtering, Filtering ofLong Data Sequences - Radix-2 FFT Algorithms - Decimation-in-Time FFT algorithm, Decimation-in-Frequency FFT algorithm.

(12)FIR FILTERSSymmetric and Antisymmetric FIR Filters - Design of Linear Phase low pass and high pass FIR Filters using Rectangular,Hamming, Hanning, Bartlett & Blackman Windows and Frequency Sampling Method, Design of FIR Differentiators and HilbertTransformers - Structure of FIR Systems- linear phase structures. (10)

IIR FILTERSDesign of Discrete time IIR Butterworth and Chebyshev type I Low pass and High pass filters - Design of IIR Filter by ImpulseInvariance and Bilinear Transformation - Structure of IIR Systems - Direct, Cascade and Parallel form structures. (9)

FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS AND MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSINGQuantization Process and Errors - Quantization of Fixed point and Floating point numbers - Coefficient quantization effects - A/D Conversion Noise Analysis - Round-off Errors - Dynamic range Scaling - Limit Cycles in IIR Filters. Decimation - Interpolation- Basic sample rate alteration - Multirate structures for sampling rate conversion - Multistage design of decimator and interpolator.

(8)

DSP ARCHITECTUREFixed Point and Floating Point DSPs - Features of Digital Signal Processing Architecture - Bus Architecture - DSP ComputationalBuilding Blocks - On-Chip Memory - TMS320C67XX Architecture - Addressing Modes - Instructions sets. (6)

TOTAL : 45+30=75

TEXT BOOKS1. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, "Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Applications", Pearson

Education, 4th Edition, 20072. V. Oppenheim, R. W. Shafer and J.R.Buck, "Discrete-Time Signal Processing", Pearson Education, 4th Edition,2011

L T P C3 2 0 4

46

REFERENCES1. Sanjit. K. Mitra "Digital Signal Processing - A computer based approach", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2011.2. Ifeachor E.C. & Jervis B.W., "Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2002.3. Lonnie C.Ludeman, "Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing", Wiley, 2009.4. B.Venkata Ramani, M.Bhaskar,"Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and Applications", Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2002.5. Monson H Hayes, "Schaum's Outlines of - Digital Signal Processing",Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,2012.

47

15EC54 - CONTROL SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Ascertain the transfer function of Mechanical and Electrical systems using block diagram reduction and signal flow

graph methodsCO2 : a. Determine time domain response, specifications and steady state errors of first and second order systems.

b. Explain the importance of P, PI & PID controllers in control systems designCO3 : a. Sketch and estimate frequency domain specifications of all-pass & minimum phase systems using bode & polar

plotsb. Design Lead & Lag compensations to stabilize control systems.

CO4 : Test the stability of system by applying Root locus, Nyquist stability criterion and Routh Hurwitz criterion for a systemtransfer function.

CO5 : a. Draw state model of electrical systems, determine solution of state equation using state space representationb. Test the controllability and observability of systems using Kalman's test.

CONTROL SYSTEM MODELLINGLinear control systems- Open loop and closed loop systems-Elements of closed loop systems - Transfer function- Mathematicalmodel of physical systems - Mechanical systems: Translational & Rotational systems- Electrical systems - Block diagram reductionmethod- Signal flow graph - Mason's gain formula. (9)

TIME DOMAIN RESPONSEStandard test signals - Type and order of systems -Time domain study of first and second order feedback control systems - Timedomain specifications - Steady state errors - Error constants- Introduction to P, PI and PID Controllers. (9)

FREQUENCY DOMAIN RESPONSEFrequency response - Frequency domain specifications - Bode plot- Polar plot - Gain Margin - Phase Margin - All pass andminimum phase systems- Lead, Lag, and Lag- Lead Compensators (9)

STABILITY RESPONSEConcepts of stability - Location of roots on S-plane for stability - Necessary conditions for stability- Routh Hurwitz criterion- Rootlocus - Construction of root loci - Nyquist stability Criterion - Assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion - closed loopstability. (9)

SYSTEM STATE VARIABLEConcepts of State, State variable and state model- State space representation using physical, phase and canonical variables(Electrical Systems) - State transition matrix - Solution of state equations - Concepts of Controllability & Observability (Kalman'stest only). (9)

TOTAL : 45+30=75

TEXT BOOKS1. Nagrath,I.J. and M.Gopal, "Control Systems Engineering", New Age International Publishers, 5th Edition, 2011.2. Ktsuhiko Ogata, "Modern Control Engineering", Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 5th Edition, 2010.

L T P C3 2 0 4

48

REFERENCES1. Norman S.Nise, "Control Systems Engineering", John Wiley, 6th Edition, 2012.2. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, "Modern Control Systems", Addison Wesley, 11th Edition, 2008.3. Benjamin.C.Kuo, "Automatic control systems", Prentice Hall of India, 8th Edition, 2007.4. A.Nagoor Kani, "Control Systems", RBA Publications, 2006.5. W.Bolton, "Control Systems", Newnes, Elsevier Limited, 1st Edition, 2006.

49

15EC55 - DISCRETE TIME SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Sketch the Spectrum of Discrete time signals and frequency response of Linear Time Invariant systemsCO2 : Implement and test FIR/IIR Low pass & High pass filters and Multirate sampling rate convertersCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTSThe following experiments are implemented using open source software and Fixed / Floating point DSP Processors.• Verification of Linear Convolution and Circular Convolution• Spectral Analysis using FFT• Design and testing of IIR Low pass and High Pass filters• Design and testing of FIR Low pass and High pass filters using Windowing technique• Design and testing of Multirate sampling rate converters

REFERENCES1. Discrete TimeSignal Processing Lab Manual, Department of ECE, CIT.2. Sen M. Kuo, Bob H. Lee, and Wenshun Tian, "Real-Time Digital Signal Processing: Fundamentals, Implementations and

Applications", Wiley, 3rd Edition, 2013.3. Rulph Chassaing, Donald S. Reay, "Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the TMS320C6713 and TMS320C6416

DSK", Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2011.4. Donald Reay, "Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the OMAP - L138 Experimenter" Wiley, 2012.5. www.ti.com/products/OMAPL138.

L T P C0 0 2 1

50

15EC56 - MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Develop 8051 Assembly Language Programs for Arithmetic, Logic, Bit manipulation, String operations and

Demonstrate an application for 8051 microcontroller using Traffic light controller, ADC & DAC interfacing boardsCO2 : Demonstrate 8051 Embedded C Coding for Programming the GPIO, Timer, Interrupts & Serial Port and a system for

temperature monitoring using Ardiuno target BoardCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

Developing Assembly Language Programs using 8051 Microcontroller Kits• Data manipulating Operations and Delay Routines• String operations• Interfacing Traffic light controller• Interfacing ADC• Interfacing DAC

Using IDE Tool for Microcontroller• Memory Data Transfer Operations & Input/Output Port Programming.• Timer/Counter Programming.• Serial Port Programming.• Handling Interrupts• Temperature monitoring using Arduino Target Board

REFERENCES1. Microcontrollers Laboratory manual prepared by ECE department, CIT.2. Krishna Kant, "Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and System Design using 8085, 8086,

8051, 8096", Prentice Hall of India, Ist Edition, 2011.

L T P C0 0 2 1

51

15EC61 - ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : a. Explain the concept and derive radiation parameters for monopole & dipole

b. Analyze and determine performance parameters of antenna.CO2 : a. Derive and Determine Array factor, Beam width & null angles,

b. Design N element linear arrays with uniform &non-uniform amplitude and equal spacingc. Explain the principles of operation of Yagi-Uda array and smart antennae

CO3 : a. Categorize antennas based on structure and radiation characteristicsb. Characterize small loop, slot and horn antennae

CO4 : a. Design single element microstrip patch antennab. Explain the geometry, characteristics& feed systems of parabolic reflector antennac. Solve basic design problems in reflector antennae

CO5 : a. Illustrate antenna parameter measurement methodsb. Summarize the characteristic effects and parameters of Ground wave, Sky wave and Space wav propagations

in atmosphere

ANTENNA BASICS AND PARAMETERSConcept of radiation - Types of antennas - Current distribution - Fundamental parameters: Radiation Pattern-Radiation PowerDensity - Radiation Intensity - Beamwidth - Gain - Directivity-Bandwidth Polarization - Antenna efficiency - Effective aperture -Friis transmission equation - Field regions separation - Monopole antenna - Half wave dipole: Field components - Total radiatedpower - Radiation resistance - Folded dipole. (9)

ANTENNA ARRAYSNeed for antenna arrays - Design of two element array - Multiplication of pattern - N-element linear array : Uniform amplitude andspacing - Design of broadside & end fire arrays : Non-uniform amplitude and equal spacing - Design of binomial array - Phasedarray design - Yagi Uda antenna - Concept of smart antenna. (10)

LOOP, SLOT & HORN ANTENNASSmall circular loop : Far field pattern, Analysis of Radiation resistance, Directivity of circular loop and Design of small circularloop antenna - Application in Radio direction finding - Babinet's principle - Slot antenna: Far field pattern, Impedance of slotantenna & Analysis of slot characteristics - Rectangular Horn - Pyramidal Horn - Conical Horn - Radiation pattern. (10)

MICROSTRIP & REFLECTOR ANTENNASMicrostrip antenna : Basic Characteristics, feeding methods, Return loss, Transmission line model analysis of microstrip antenna- Design of single rectangular microstrip patch antenna - Inset feed impedance matching - Design of single circular microstrippatch antenna. Reflector antennae: Parabolic reflectors - Feed systems: Waveguide Horn feed, Rear Feed, Front feed, OffsetFeed and Cassegrain feed. (9)

ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS&WAVE PROPAGATIONAntenna Ranges-Anechoic chambers & absorbing materials - Compact Antenna Test Ranges (CATRs) - Radiation patternmeasurement- Gain & Directivity measurements.Wave Propagation : Modes of propagation- Structure of atmosphere - Ground wave propagation - Sky wave propagation - Virtual height - Maximum usable frequency -Skip distance - Space wave propagation (7)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

52

TEXT BOOKS1. C.A.Balanis, "Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design", John Wiley & Sons Inc., 4th Edition, 2015.2. John D.Kraus, Ronald J.Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, "Antennas and Wave Propagation" Tata Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition,

2010.

REFERENCES1. Warren L. Stutzman, Gary A. Thiele, "Antenna theory and design", John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 3rd Edition, 20132. Yi Huang, Kevin Boyle, "Antennas : From Theory to Practice", John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2008.3. S.Drabowitch, A.Papiernik, J. Encinas, H,Griffiths and G.Smith, "Modern Antennas", Springer Science, 2013.4. Girish Kumar, K.P.Ray, "Broadband Microstrip Antennas", Artech house Inc., Boston, 2003.5. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidananda, "Antennas and Wave Propagation", Oxford University Press, 2007.

53

15EC62 - DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Apply source coding procedure and calculate coding efficiency based on entropy and mutual informationCO2 : Calculate channel capacity using Shannon's channel capacity theoremCO3 : Interpret Nyquist criteria for distortion less transmission and analyze performance degradation due to ISICO4 : Outline different bandpass modulation & demodulation techniques and compare their performanceCO5 : Illustrate the PN sequence generators and the principles of Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum and Frequency

Hopping Spread Spectrum systems

INFORMATION THEORY AND SCHEMES FOR SOURCE CODINGUncertainty Information and Entropy - Basic Properties of entropy - Information rate - Conditional entropy - Joint Entropy - MutualInformation - Channel capacity of a Gaussian channelSOURCE CODING : Prefix codes - Necessary conditions for source coding - Huffman Coding - Efficiency calculations. (11)

MEMORYLESS FINITE SCHEMES FOR CHANNEL CODINGChannel models - BSC and BEC channels - Shannon's channel coding theorem - Linear block codes - Syndrome decoding -Cyclic codes: Generator polynomial - Parity check polynomial -Calculation of syndrome - Convolutional codes - Viterbi decoding.

(12)

BASEBAND DEMODULATION/DETECTIONSignaling formats - Inter symbol Interference - Nyquist Criteria for distortion less transmission - Pulse Shaping - Error PerformanceDegradation - Demodulation/Detection of Shaped Pulses - Eye Pattern - Duobinary coding - Gram-Schmidt OrthogonalizationProcedure (12)

BANDPASS MODULATION AND DEMODULATION/DETECTIONBandpass Modulation and Demodulation - Decision region - Signal Space Diagram for ASK,FSK,PSK,DPSK - Coherent Detection:Maximum Likelihood Receiver Structure - Matched Filter - Correlation Realization of the Matched filter and Optimal Filters - Non-coherent Detection: Envelope Detector of FSK - Bit Error Probability for ASK, BPSK, BFSK, DPSK and QPSK -Signaling andPerformance of M-ary schemes (13)

SPREAD SPECTRUM TECHNIQUESPseudonoise Sequences - Properties - Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Systems - Processing Gain and Performance -Frequency Hopping Systems - Fast Hopping versus Slow Hopping - FFH/MFSK Demodulator - Synchronization - Acquisition -Tracking (12)

TOTAL : 60

TEXT BOOKS1. Roberto Togneri, Christopher J.S DeSilva, "Fundamentals of Information Theory and Coding Design", CRC press, 20032. Simon Haykins, "Digital Communications Systems", 1st Edition, Wiley, 2013.

REFERENCES1. Bernard Sklar, Pabitra Kumar Ray, "Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education, 2nd

Edition, 2009.

L T P C4 0 0 4

54

2. John G. Proakis, "Digital Communications", McGraw Hill International Edition, 4th Edition, 2001.3. Taub & Schilling, "Principles of Communication Systems", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2013.4. Thomas M. Cover and Joy A. Thomas, "Elements of Information Theory", John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2006.5. Todd K.Moon, "Error Correction Coding: Mathematical Methods and algorithms", John Wiley & Sons, 2005.

55

15EC63 - EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Interpret the hardware and software components of an embedded system for an application and infer the architecture

and programming model of ARM processor.CO2 : Infer the instruction set and exception types of ARM processor to develop Assembly language programsCO3 : Exemplify the serial and parallel communication devices and protocols and develop Application software for embedded

systemsCO4 : Illustrate the key concepts in real time embedded application development using RTOSCO5 : Exemplify the scheduling algorithms and inter-task communication tools in building real time embedded Systems

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS & ARCHITECTURE OF ARM PROCESSORProcessor Embedded into a system - Embedded Hardware units and devices in a system - Embedded Software in a System -Classification of Embedded Systems - Embedded Design Life Cycle - Design Example: Model Train Controller. ARM EmbeddedSystem - CISC and RISC Processors - ARM Architecture - Programming Model - Operating Modes. (9)

ARM PROGRAMMINGARM Instruction Set - ARM Instruction Types: Data Transfer, Data Processing and Control Flow Instructions - Interrupts - Exceptionstypes - NVIC Registers for interrupt control. (9)

DEVICES AND BUSES FOR DEVICE NETWORKI/O types - Serial Devices: Synchronous, Iso- Synchronous and Asynchronous Communications - Internal Serial-CommunicationDevices: SCI, SPI, SI & UART- Parallel Port Devices - Serial Communication Protocols: I2C, USB and CAN - Advanced I/O Serialhigh speed buses : ISA, PCI, PCI-X and advanced buses (9)

REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMOperating System Basics - Types of Operating Systems - Foreground / Background systems - Critical section of code - Resource- Shared Resource - Tasks, Process and Threads, States - Types of Real-time tasks -Task Periodicity - Multiprocessing andMultitasking. (9)

REAL TIME TASK COMMUNICATIONRTOS Task scheduling models: Co-operative Round Robin Scheduling, Cyclic Scheduling with Time Slicing, RM and EDF -Priority Inheritance Protocol - Semaphores and Shared Data - Message Queues - Mailboxes and Pipes - Dead lock - CaseStudy: Digital Camera - Smartcard (9)

TOTAL: 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Andrew N.Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, "ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System

Software", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1st Edition, 2004.2. Raj Kamal, "Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES1. Jonathan W Valvano, "Embedded Systems: Introduction to Arm® Cortex TM-M Microcontrollers", 5th Edition, 2015.2. Steve Furber, "ARM System on Chip Architecture", Addison Wesley Professional, 2nd Edition, 20003. Joseph Yiu, "The Definitive Guide to ARM Cortex-M3 processors", Elsevier - Newness publication, 3rd Edition, 2014.4. Shibu K.V, "Introduction to Embedded Systems", Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1st Edition, 2009.5. Jean J.Labrosse, "Embedded Systems Building Blocks", CMP Books, 2nd Edition, 2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

56

15EC64 - DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the digital image formation process and its representation & compute the forward and inverse transform for

a given imageCO2 : Apply spatial and frequency domain image enhancement techniques for enhancing the contrast and improving the

visual perception of an imageCO3 : Apply image restoration filters in spatial and frequency domain to recover an image that has been degraded and use

morphological operators to extract image components that are useful in the representation and description of shape.CO4 : Compute the Entropy, compression ratio and efficiency using various image compression techniques.CO5 : Apply image segmentation techniques to extract regions of interest from an image and use descriptors to describe

the region in a form suitable for computer processing.

DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS & TRANSFORMSFundamentals of Image processing - Image sampling and Quantization - Basic relationship between pixels. Image Transforms:Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform, Hadamard Transform, Walsh transform, Haar and Karhunen LoeveTransform. (9)

IMAGE ENHANCEMENTBasic intensity transformation functions - Histogram processing: Specification, Equalization - Smoothing spatial filters - Sharpeningspatial filters - Frequency domain Filters: Smoothing and Sharpening - Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI Models. (9)

IMAGE RESTORATIONModel of image degradation - Noise Models - Mean filters - Order statistics filters - Adaptive filters - Linear position invariantdegradations - Inverse filtering -Wiener filtering - Constrained least square filtering - Morphological operators -Dilation, Erosion,Opening and Closing. (9)

IMAGE COMPRESSIONCoding redundancy - Spatial and temporal redundancy - Irrelevant information - Measuring image information - Fidelity criteria- Image compression models - Image formats- Huffman coding- Arithmetic coding -LZW coding -Run length coding - Bit planecoding -Block transform coding - Predictive coding- Wavelet Coding -JPEG. (9)

IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND DESCRIPTIONPoint detection- line detection - Edge detection - Edge linking and boundary detection: Local processing, Global processing -Hough Transform - Thresholding: Global thresholding, Optimal thresholding- Region based segmentation- Chain codes-Skeletons- Boundary descriptors: Simple descriptors, Shape numbers - Regional Descriptors: Simple descriptors, Topological descriptors- Relational descriptors. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Rafael C.Gonzalez & Richard E.Woods, "Digital Image Processing", 3rdEdition, Pearson Education, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

57

REFERENCES1. Anil.K.Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing", Prentice Hall of India, 1989.2. Sid Ahmed M.A., "Image Processing - Theory, Algorithm and Architecture", McGraw Hill, 2009.3. William K.Pratt, "Digital Image Processing", John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2007.4. Jayaraman S, Esakkirajan S & Veerakumar T, "Digital image Processing", Tata McGraw Hill, reprint 2010.5. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac & Roger Boyle, "Image processing, Analysis and Machine Vision", Thomson Asia Prt. Ltd, 4th

Edition, 2015.

58

15EC65 - DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Explain algorithm, its notations and its complexityCO2 : Use the essential data structures such as lists, stacks, queues to represent real world problems.CO3 : Apply the concepts of trees and priority queues in data structures.CO4 : Choose the appropriate graph algorithm for a specified applicationCO5 : Analyze sorting, searching algorithms with their complexities and their application

DATA, INFORMATION AND ALGORITHM ANALYSISData Vs Information - Representation of numbers: Integer, Real, Representation of Characters - Definition of an algorithm - Basicsteps in development of an algorithm - Algorithm notations - Sparks - Algorithm complexity - Space and Time complexity - Ordernotations (9)

LINEAR DATA STRUCTURESArrays: Representation of arrays, Array operations- Fundamentals of Stacks, Queues - Application of stacks: Recursion - Evaluationof expressions - Application of Queues : Wire Routing. Linked Lists: Singly linked list, doubly linked lists and circularly LinkedList - Linked stacks and queues - Application of Linked list: Polynomial manipulation (9)

TREES AND PRIORITY QUEUESBinary Trees: Representations, Traversal, Properties - Binary search tree - insertion and deletion - Application of trees: Expressiontree, Decision Trees, Game Trees. Priority Queues (Heaps) - Binary Heap - Applications of priority queues- Leftist Heap-SkewHeap (9)

GRAPHSRepresentations - Traversals - Depth First Search (DFS), Breadth First Search (BFS) -Connected components - Spanning Trees- Shortest path: Warshall algorithm, Dijkstra's Algorithm -Transitive closure - Activity networks -Topological sort. (9)

SORTING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUESSorting algorithms: Selection sort- Bubble sort- Insertion sort - Shell sort - Quick sort - Heap sort - Merge sort - Searching: Linearsearch , Binary search, - Hashing Techniques. (9)

TOTAL : 45+30=75

TEXT BOOKS1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, "Fundamentals of Data Structures in C", Galgotia Publications, 2008.2. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, "An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications", McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition, 2008.

REFERNCES1. Mark Allen Weiss, "Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education,19972. Seymour Lipschutz, "Data Structures", Schaum's Outline, McGraw Hill, 2011.3. Balagurusamy, "Data Structures using C", McGraw Hill, 2013.4. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, "Data Structures and Algorithms", Pearson Education,1983.5. ReemaThareja, "Data Structures Using C", Oxford University Press, 2011.

L T P C3 2 0 4

59

15EC66 - EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Develop ARM Assembly Language Programs for Arithmetic operations, configure and control GPIO port pins, timer/

counter operation and interruptsCO2 : Demonstrate applications of ARM processor using LEDs , Sensors, LCD Display & Stepper motor and DC motor

controlCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

Experiments using ARM Processor• Searching and Sorting an Array• Programming General Purpose Input / Output (GPIO) port pins• Programming of On chip Timer / Counter• Serial Communication Programming• Handling interrupt requests• Interfacing an LED• Interfacing LCD Display• Interfacing Stepper motor• Interfacing DC motor• Data Acquisition and control for Industrial Automation

REFERENCES1. Embedded Systems Laboratory manual prepared by ECE department, CIT.2. Mohammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi, "The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems", Pearson Education

Asia, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2008.3. Steve Furber, "ARM System on Chip Architecture", Addison Wesley Professional, 2nd Edition, 2000.4. Andrew N.Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, "ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System

Software", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1st Edition, 2004.

L T P C0 0 2 1

60

15EC67 - ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Construct and test analog modulation, pulse amplitude modulation, pulse code modulation,digital modulation and

demodulation circuitsCO2 : Simulate PN sequences and test random and burst error correcting codersCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Generation and demodulation of Amplitude Modulated signal• Generation and demodulation of Frequency Modulated signal• Verification of sampling theorem and testing of pulse analog modulation circuits• Testing of Pulse Code Modulation circuits• Testing of Delta Modulation and Demodulation systems• Generation and detection of BFSK, BPSK and QPSK modulation scheme• Generation of PN Sequences• Implementation of Linear Block Coders and Cyclic Coders• Implementation of Convolutional Coders• Test the performance of Digital Communication system under AWGN

REFERENCES1. Analog and Digital Communication Lab Manual, Department of ECE, CIT.2. Robert W. Heath J., "Digital Communication Physical Layer Exploration Lab Using the NI USRP", National Technology &

Science Press, 2012.3. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2009.

L T P C0 0 2 1

61

15EC71 - RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : (i) Ability to analyze and characterize given system or network based on it's scattering parameters.

(ii) Ability to derive Scattering parameter for given simple passive network.CO2 : (i) Ability to design RF filters based on design criteria

(ii) Ability to design microstrip lines for given impedance.(iii) Knowledge to implement filters using microstrip lines

CO3 : Ability to design RF Amplifiers to meet criteria based on stability, gain and noise figure requirements.CO4 : Ability to design and analyze oscillators operated at RF frequenciesCO5 : Knowledge on test & measurement methods for measuring power, frequency, losses,VSWR, Scattering and spectral

parameters.

MICROWAVE DEVICE CHARACTERIZATIONSignificance and issues of RF design - Frequency Spectrum - Scattering Matrix - Properties - Transmission (ABCD) Matrix -Three port and Four port Network Characterization - Lossless Divider - Resistive Divider - Quadrature Hybrid (Branch lineCoupler) - 180O Hybrid Junction - Coupled line directional coupler. (13)

FILTERSBasic Resonator and Filter configurations - Filter characteristics - Filter design based on Insertion Loss Method - Butterworth andChebyshev filters - Prototype filter design and normalization - LPF, HPF, BPF and BSF - Filter Implementation - Kuroda's Identities- Microstrip realization of filters- Stepped Impedance Realisation- Design of Microstripline (11)

RF AMPLIFIERTwo port Power Gains - Unilateral power gain - Available power gain - Stability - Stability Circles - Tests for unconditional stability- Single Stage Transistor Amplifier Design: Design for maximum gain, Design for constant gain & Low noise amplifier design.

(13)

OSCILLATORS AND MIXERSBasic Oscillator Model - Negative Resistance oscillator - Feedback oscillator design -High Frequency oscillator: Fixed frequencyOscillator - Voltage controlled oscillator - Mixers : Single Ended mixer , Single & Double Balanced Mixer and Image Reject Mixer.

(11)MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTSTunable Detector - Slotted line Carriage - Spectrum Analyzer - Network Analyzer - Power measurements - Insertion Loss,Attenuation and VSWR measurements - Impedance measurement by Slotted line method - Frequency measurement methods- Dielectric constant measurement by waveguide method. (12)

TOTAL : 30+30 = 60

TEXT BOOKS1. David M.Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Wiley, 4th Edition, 2012.2. Reinhold Ludwig and Gene Bogdanov, "RF Circuit Design - Theory and Applications", Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.

L T P C2 2 0 3

62

REFERENCES1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K.Das, "Microwave Engineering", McGraw Hill Education (India) ,3rd Edition, 2015.2. Robert.E.Colin, "Foundations of Microwave Engineering", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2007.3. R.S. Rao, "Microwave Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2015.4. Devendra K.Mishra "Radio- Frequency and Microwave Communication Circuits: Analysis and Design", John Wiley and

Sons, 2004.5. W. Alan Davis, "Radio Frequency Circuit Design", Wiley, 2nd Edition 2010.6. Inder Bahl, Prakash Bhartia,"Microwave Solid State Circuit Design", Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2003.

63

15EC72 - WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the cellular concepts, Channel Assignment Strategies, Multiple access techniques and interpret the cellular

capacityCO2 : Illustrate path loss, small scale and large scale fading in mobile channelsCO3 : Compare different linear equalization algorithms & diversity techniques and conclude their choice for wireless channelsCO4 : Analyze and explain the concepts of CDMA, OFDM and MANETCO5 : Differentiate 2G, 3G, 4G Wireless standards with their architecture features and applications

BASIC CELLULAR CONCEPTSFrequency Reuse - Channel Assignment Strategies - Handoff Strategies - Interference and System Capacity - Trunking andGrade of Service - Multiple access techniques: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, SDMA - Capacity in Cellular Systems. (9)

MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATIONRadio Wave Propagation - Free Space Propagation Model - Ground Reflection Model , Diffraction , Scattering - Practical linkbudget design - Small scale fading - Time dispersion parameters - Coherence bandwidth - Doppler spread & Coherence time,Fading due to Multipath time delay spread - Fading due to Doppler spread (9)EQUALIZATION & DIVERSITY TECHNIQUESEqualizer filter types - Linear equalization -Non linear equalizer - Least Mean Square - Recursive Least square algorithms -Diversity Techniques - Selection Diversity, Maximal Ratio Combining - Equal Gain Combining - Rake Receiver. (9)

WIRELESS NETWORKSGSM Network Architecture -Hierarchy - Channels - Modulation for GSM - Multiple access for GSM - Frequency allocation -Services - System capacity - CDMA - Signal generation - codes used in CDMA - Forward and Reverse link code channels - callprocessing - CDMA Vs WCDMA - OFDM transmitter and receiver- Mobile Ad-Hoc Network(MANET) (9)

WIRELESS ARCHITECTURESIEEE 802 Architecture - Wi-Fi- IEEE 802.11a/g (OFDM) - IEEE 802.11b (DSSS) - IEEE 802.15(WPAN) - Wireless MetropolitanArea Network - Wi-MAX -IEEE 802.16 - 4G LTE - LTE Advanced - IEEE 802.16e -IEEE 802.16m- 5G and advances (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Rappaport,T.S, "Wireless communications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 20162. William Stallings, "Wireless Communications and Networks" , Pearson Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES1. Andrea Goldsmith, "Wireless Communications", Cambridge University Press, 2005.2. David Tse, Pramod Viswanath, "Fundamentals of Wireless Communication", Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition,

2005.3. Clint Smith. P.E, and Daniel Collins, "3G Wireless Networks", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.4. Howard Huang, Constantinos B. Papadias, Sivarama Venkatesan, "MIMO Communication for wireless networks", Springer,

2011.5. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/37(38)

L T P C3 0 0 3

64

15EC73 - OPTICAL COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : a. Perform cross-talk analysis in switches.

b. Derive the power transfer function of the Mach-Zender interferometerc. Compare generations of Optical networks, layered architecture and functionsd. Characterize an Optical component based on its scattering parameterse. Analyze given operating parameters and determine the losses in passive optical devices

CO2 : a. Explain the architecture and traffic flow of Optical networks.b. Compare the throughputs of modified slotted aloha protocol and it's original version.c. Derive the throughput for SA/SA MAC Layer protocol

CO3 : a. Illustrate routing and wavelength assignment methodsb. Analyze given route and traffic requirements and determine minimum wavelengths required to design a network.c. Analyze traffic models applicable for wavelength routing network and determine the cost trade-off for designing

a ring networkCO4 : a. Illustrate the function of Photonic packet switching network

b. Compare and explain different architectures of access networksc. Determine the best optical network topology and routing to serve a specified application.

CO5 : a. Identify, illustrate and compare the management and control aspects of optical networksb. Compute cross-talk for limited distance in optical networks for given network specifications and parameters.

OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTSOptical transmission basics - Network evolution - Light propagation in optical fibers - Loss & bandwidth, System limitations, Non-Linear effects - Solitons - Optical Components: Couplers, Isolators, Circulators, Multiplexers & Filters - Optical Amplifiers -Switches - Wavelength Converters. (9)

OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURESIntroduction to Optical Networks - SONET/SDH - Metro Networks - Layered Architecture - Broadcast and Select Networks -Topologies for Broadcast Networks - Media Access Control Protocols - Testbeds for Broadcast & Select WDM. (9)

WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKSWavelength Routing Architecture - The optical layer - Node designs - Optical layer Cost trade off- Routing and wavelengthassignment - Virtual topology design - Wavelength Routing Testbeds. (9)

PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKSPhotonic Packet Switching - OTDM - Multiplexing and Demultiplexing - Synchronization - Burst switching - Access Networks -Network Architecture overview - Optical Access Network Architectures. (9)

NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEMTransmission System Engineering - System model - Power penalty - Transmitter - Receiver - Optical amplifiers - Crosstalk -Dispersion - Wavelength stabilization - Overall design considerations - Control and management: Network management functions,Configuration management, Performance management, Fault management, Optical safety. (9)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

65

TEXT BOOK1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, Galen Sasaki "Optical Networks: A Practical Perspective", Elsevier/Morgan

Kaufmann, 3rd Edition,2010.

REFERENCES1. C.Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, "WDM Optical Networks: Concept, Design and Algorithms", Prentice Hall of

India, 2002.2. Biswanath Mukherjee, "Optical WDM Networks", Springer Science, 2006.3. Thomas E. Stern, Georgios Ellinas, Krishna Bala, "Multiwavelength Optical Networks - Architecture,Design and control ",

Cambridge University Press, 2nd Edition, 2009.4. Govind P.Agrawal, "Fiber-Optic Communication Systems", John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition, 2012.5. P.E.Green, "Fiber Optic Networks", Prentice Hall, 1993.

66

15EC74 - VLSI DESIGN

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Examine the I-V and DC characteristics of MOS transistors and sketch the layout of CMOS Circuits by means of

stick diagramCO2 : Design and compare the static and dynamic CMOS combinational circuits using different logic stylesCO3 : Design the static and dynamic CMOS sequential circuits using different logic stylesCO4 : Develop and design VLSI sub systems and memoriesCO5 : Determine the impact of interconnects in VLSI circuit physical design and discuss about the test generation methods

for CMOS circuits

MOS TRANSISTORS AND FABRICATIONCMOS Logic - VLSI Design flow - Ideal I-V Characteristics of MOS Transistors - Non Ideal I-V Effects - DC transfer characteristics- n-well CMOS processing Technology - Fabrication materials - stick Diagram and layout design rules - Layout of CMOS Circuits.

(12)

COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS DESIGNCircuit Families - Static CMOS - Pseudo NMOS Logic - Clocked CMOS Logic - Domino Logic - Cascode Voltage Switch Logic -Dynamic Logic - Pass transistor Logic -Transmission gate logic. (12)

SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS DESIGNSequencing static circuits - Circuit design of latches and flip-flops - Conventional CMOS Latches and flip-flops: Pulsed latches -Resettable latches and flip-flops - enabled latches and flip flops - Incorporating Logic into latches - TSPC Latches and flip-flops- Sequencing dynamic circuits - Domino Circuits. (12)

VLSI SUBSYSTEMS DESIGN AND MEMORIESBit Adders - Ripple Carry Adder - Carry look-ahead adder - High speed adders - Subtractor -One/Zero detectors - Comparators- Shifters - Unsigned array and 2's complement array multipliers - Booth Multiplier - Wallace tree multiplier - Series multiplier -series and parallel division - Shifters - FPGA Architectures -Latches and Registers -SRAM and Dynamic RAM (12)

SYSTEM LEVEL PHYSICAL DESIGN AND TESTINGLarge Scale physical design - Interconnect delay modeling - cross talk - Interconnect scaling - Floorplanning and routing - Powerdistribution and consumption - Low power design considerations - General concepts: CMOS Testing - Test generation methods.

(12)TOTAL : 60

TEXT BOOKS1. Neil H.E.Weste, David Harris "CMOS VLSI Design - A Circuits and Systems Perspective", Pearson Education, 4th Edition,

2015.2. John P.Uyemura, "Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems", John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

REFERENCES1. Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, "Digital Integrated Circuits A Design Perspective", Prentice Hall

of India, 2nd Edition, 2012.

L T P C4 0 0 4

67

2. Eugene D.Fabricius," Introduction to VLSI Design", Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1st Edition, 1990.3. Gary K. Yeap,"Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design", Kluwer Academic Publishers, Boston, 1st Ediiton,1998.4. Neil H.E. Weste and Kamran Eshraghian, "Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System Perspective", Addison Wesley, New

Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2009.5. Charles H.Roth and Lizy Kurian John,"Digital System design using VHDL", John Wiley& Sons, 2nd Edition, 2013.

68

15EC75 - RF AND MICROWAVE LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Test and measure parameters, interpret and analyze measured data, record and present results of tests on Reflex

Klystron and passive microwave devices.CO2 : (i) Test and measure parameters, interpret and analyze measured data, record and present results of tests on

passive antennae(ii) Design, Simulate, observe results, interpret and analyze measured data, record and present results of simulations

of RF amplifiers, oscillators, antenna and micro-striplines.CO3 : Develop Communication Skills and capability to work in team and achieve goals

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS• Characterization of Passive devices: Isolator, Circulator, Magic Tee and Directional coupler• Measurement of Mode characteristics of Reflex Klystron• Determination of VSWR and unknown impedance• Determination of Dielectric constant of solid dielectric• Determination of losses for single and two port RF devices• Determination of Radiation pattern of antenna ( Horn and Dielectric) for absolute gain• Determination of Isotropic gain for a given antenna• Design, Simulation and analysis of Microstrip-lines and antenna.• Design, simulation and analysis of RF amplifier• Design, simulation and analysis of RF oscillator

REFERENCES1. RF and Microwave Lab Manual Department of ECE, CIT2. David M.Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Wiley, 4th Edition, 2012.3. Reinhold Ludwig and Gene Bogdanov, "RF Circuit Design - Theory and applications", Prentice Hall, Second Edition, 2001.

L T P C0 0 2 1

69

15EC76 - WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS LABORATORY


COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Implement the fading channel models, diversity & equalization techniques and multi carrier modulation techniquesCO2 : Simulate and measure the performance of QoS metric for different layer of wireless networksCO3 : Develop communication skills and capability to work in team

LIST OF EXPERIMENTSThe following experiments are implemented using software and hardware• Large Scale & Small Scale Fading Channel Models• Equalization Techniques• Diversity Techniques• Spread Spectrum systems• Space Time Block Codes• OFDM Transmitter & Receiver• Random MAC Protocols• Wireless Routing Protocols• Performance Analysis of QoS Metric for Wireless Networks

REFERENCES1. Wireless Communication and Networks Lab Manual, Department of ECE, CIT.2. Rappaport,T.S., "Wireless communications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2010.3. Robert W. Heath J., "Digital Communication Physical Layer Exploration Lab Using the NI USRP", National Technology &

Science Press, 2012.

L T P C0 0 2 1

70

15ECE01 - MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION AND NETWORKS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Illustrate various multimedia components and its characteristics.CO2 : Interpret the various techniques for audio and video compression.CO3 : Determine the average length of text and image by various compression techniques, and calculate the compression

ratio.CO4 : Illustrate the network architecture and various communication protocols for VoIP. Identify the challenges and key

factors to improve the performance and QoS parameters of VoIP.CO5 : Analyze the various multimedia networking protocols to provide the best effort service for Real time interactive

multimedia application.

MULTIMEDIA COMPONENTSIntroduction - Multimedia skills - Multimedia components and their characteristics - Text, sound, images, graphics, animation,video, hardware. (9)

AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPRESSIONAudio compression-DPCM-Adaptive DPCM -Adaptive Predictive Coding-Linear Predictive Coding-Code Excited LPC- Perpetualcoding - Video compression principles-H.261, H.263, MPEG 1, 2, 4. (9)

TEXT AND IMAGE COMPRESSIONCompression principles-Source encoders and destination encoders-Lossless and lossy compression-Entropy encoding -Sourceencoding- Text compression -Static Huffman coding ,Dynamic Huffman coding - Arithmetic coding -Lempel Ziv-Welsh Compression-Image compression. (9)

VoIP TECHNOLOGYBasics of IP transport, VoIP challenges, H.323/ SIP -Network Architecture, Protocols, Call establishment and release, VoIP andSS7, Quality of Service - CODEC Methods-VOIP applicability. (9)

MULTIMEDIA NETWORKINGMultimedia networking- Applications- Streamed stored and audio-making - Best Effort service-Protocols for real time interactiveapplications- Distributing multimedia- Beyond best effort service- Secluding and policing Mechanisms- Integrated services-Differentiated Services-RSVP. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Fred Halshall,"Multimedia communication-Applications, Networks, Protocols and Standards", Pearson Education, 2007.2. Tay Vaughan, "Multideai: Making It Work", 7/e, TMH, 2007.

REFERENCES1. Kurose and W. Ross, "Computer networking ?A Top down Approach", Pearson education, 3rd Edition, 2010.2. Marcus Goncalves, "Voice over IP Networks", McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,1999.3. KR. Rao,Z S Bojkovic, D A Milovanovic, "Multimedia Communication Systems : Techniques, Standards, and Networks",

Pearson Education,2007.4. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, "Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications", Pearson Education, 1st Edition,

1995.5. Ranjan Parekh, "Principles of Multimedia", 3rd Edition, 2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

71

15ECE02 - DIGITAL SWITCHING AND TRANSMISSION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : understand the fundamental building blocks of digital switching and their operating principles including signaling.CO2 : explain the features and operation of time space switching mechanisms.CO3 : analyze and determine traffic parameters related to call connect and gradeof service.CO4 : describe the concepts and explain the operating principles of network synchronization and clock recovery.CO5 : describe the structure of PDH SDH and Cross connect networks and their operation

EVOLUTION AND BUILDING BLOCKS OF SWITCHING SYSTEMSMessage switching and Circuit switching - Functions of switching systems - Distribution systems -Digital Switching Systems-Switching system hierarchy - Evolution of switching systems - Stored program control switching system - Basic Call processing- Call signaling - SS7 signalling. (7)

DIGITAL SWITCHING TECHNOLOGIESSpace Division switching - Folded switches - Digital Time Division switching - Combinational Two dimensional switching : Space-Time and Time-Space switching - Three dimensional : Space-Time-Space and Time Space Time switching - Digital CrossConnect Systems - DCS hierarchy. (8)

TELECOMMUNICATION TRAFFICUnit of traffic - congestion - traffic parameters - Busy Hours Call Attempt - Traffic Intensity - Call processing capacity- CallCompletion Ratio - Call Blocking Probability - Grade of Service - Holding time distributions - Arrival time Distributions - LossSystems - Erlang B-Formula - Delay Systems - Service Times - ErlangC Formula (9)

NETWORK SYNCHRONISATIONTiming Recovery - Clock instability - Jitter - Slips - Asynchronous Multiplexing - Plesiochronous Network Synchronisation - Pulsestuffing -Mutual synchronization - Master Slave synchronization -Hierarchical synchronization (8)

TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS Network Structure - services - regulations - standards - Digital Transmission -PDH and SDH - SDH Features - Network evolution- Cross connect - Add-Drop Mux - SDH Frame structure. (8)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Flood J E, "Telecommunications Switching, Traffic and Networks" first Indian reprint, Pearson Education India, 2001.2. ThiagarajanViswanathan, ManavBhatnagar"Telecommunication switching systems and networks" 2nd Edition, PHI Learning,

2015.

REFERENCES1. John C Bellamy, "Digital Telephony" John Wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition, 2006.2. Bosse J G van, Fabrizio U. Devetak "Signaling in Telecommunication Networks" John Wiley & Sons,2nd Edition, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

72

15ECE03 - BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Explain the Physiological signals and transducers used in biomedical engineering.CO2 : Infer the physiological parameters using specific types of meters and analyzers.CO3 : Categorize the different types of electrode systems and find suitable application for the bio electric events.CO4 : Describe the equipment used in medical imaging.CO5 : Determine the type of life assisting devices and explain the different diagnostics and therapeutic techniques for

medical applications.

FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERINGCell and its structure - Resting and Action Potential - Basic components of a biomedical system- -Physiological signals andtransducers - Transducers - selection criteria - Piezo electric, ultrasonic transducers - Temperature measurements - Fibre optictemperature sensors. (9)

NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTMeasurement of blood pressure - Cardiac output - Heart rate - Heart sound - Pulmonary function measurements - spirometer -Photo Plethysmography, Body Plethysmography - Blood Gas analyzers, pH of blood -measurement of blood pCO2, pO2, finger-tip oxymeter - ESR, GSR measurements. (9)

ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS ACQUISITION AND ANALYSISElectrodes - Limb electrodes -floating electrodes - pregelled disposable electrodes - Micro, needle and surface electrodes -Amplifiers, Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper amplifiers - Isolation amplifier - ECG - EEG - EMG - ERG - Leadsystems and recording methods - Typical waveforms - Electrical safety in medical environment, shock hazards - leakage current-Instruments for checking safety parameters of biomedical equipments. (9)

IMAGING MODALITIES AND ANALYSISRadio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques - Computer tomography - MRI - Ultrasonography - Endoscopy - Thermography -Different types of biotelemetry systems - Retinal Imaging - Imaging application in Biometric systems - Analysis of digital images.

(9)

LIFE ASSISTING, THERAPEUTIC AND ROBOTIC DEVICESPacemakers - Defibrillators - Ventilators - Nerve and muscle stimulators - Diathermy - Heart - Lung machine - Audio meters -Dialysers - Lithotripsy - ICCU patient monitoring system - Nano Robots - Robotic surgery - Advanced 3D surgical techniques-Orthopedic prostheses fixation. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, "Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology", John Wiley and Sons, New York,

4th Edition, 2012.2. Khandpur R.S, "Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES1. Leslie Cromwell,"Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement", Prentice hall of India, New Delhi 2007.2. John G. Webster, "Medical Instrumentation Application and Design", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

73

3. Duane Knudson, "Fundamentals of Biomechanics", Springer, 2nd Edition, 2007.4. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., "Health Care Systems, Technology and Techniques", Springer, 1st

Edition, 2011.5. Ed. Joseph D. Bronzino, "The Biomedical Engineering Hand Book", 3rd Edition, Boca Raton, CRC Press LLC, 2006.6. M.Arumugam, "Bio-Medical Instrumentation", Anuradha Agencies, 2006.

74

15ECE04 - VERILOG HDL

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the HDL design flow and illustrate the design methodologies of HDLCO2 : Compose gate level modelling for various digital designs with illustration of gate delays.CO3 : Design data flow modeling for digital circuits by using various operators and appropriate delays.CO4 : Develop behavioral modeling for digital circuits by providing specific conditions for sequential and parallel blocks.CO5 : Develop switch level modeling for digital circuits with specific switches and test using suitable stimulus.

OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL DESIGN WITH VERILOG HDLEvolution of Computer Aided Digital Design and Emergence of HDLs - Typical Design flow - Importance of HDLs - Popularity ofVerilog HDL - Hierarchical Modeling Concepts: Design Methodologies - 4 bit Ripple Carry Counter - Modules - Instances -Components of a Simulation. (9)

GATE LEVEL MODELINGBasic Concepts: Lexical Conventions - Data types - System Tasks and Compiler - Modules - Ports - Gate Types: AND Gate, ORGate, Buffer, Not Gate - Multiplexer - 4 bit Full Adder - Gate Delays: Rise, Fall, Turn off Delays, Minimum, Typical, MaximumDelays - Delay Examples. (9)

DATA FLOW MODELINGContinuous Assignments: Implicit Continuous Assignment - Delays: Regular Assignment Delay, Implicit Continuous AssignmentDelay, Net Declaration Delay - Expressions, Operators and Operands - Operator Types - Operator Precedence - 4 to1 Multiplexer- 4 bit Full Adder - Ripple Counter. (9)

BEHAVIOURAL MODELINGStructured Procedures - Procedural Assignments - Timing Controls - Conditional Statements - Multiway Branching - Loops -Sequential and Parallel Blocks - 4 to 1 Multiplexer - 4 bit Counters - Traffic Signal Controller. (9)

TASKS, FUNCTIONS AND SWITCH LEVEL MODELINGTasks - Functions - Differences between Tasks and Functions - Switch Level Modeling: Switch Level Modeling Elements - MOSSwitches - CMOS Switches - Bidirectional Switches - Power and Ground - Resistive Switches - Delay Specification on Switches- CMOS NOR gate - 2 to 1 Multiplexer - Simple CMOS Flip Flop. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Samir Palnitkar "VERILOG HDL - A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2011

REFERENCES1. Stephen D. M. Brown, Zvonko G. Vranesic," Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design", McGraw Hill Higher

Education, 2nd Edition, 20082. T.R. Padmanabhan, B.Bala Tripura Sundari," Design Through Verilog HDL", John Wiley & Sons, 20093. Vivek Sagdeo,"The Complete Verilog Book", Kluwer Academic Publishers, 20024. Nazeih M. Botros, "HDL Programming VHDL and Verilog", Thomson Delmar Learning, 20095. Donald Thomas, Philip Moorby, "The Verilog Hardware Description Language", Springer Science, 5th Edition, 2008

L T P C3 0 0 3

75

15ECE05 - OPERATING SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Outline the basic functionalities of operating systems, operating system components, various types of operating

system and system software, and features of Macro-processors, linkers and loaders.CO2 : Demonstrate process control and apply scheduling algorithms.CO3 : Apply principles of mutual exclusion and synchronization techniques to demonstrate process execution.CO4 : Examine various memory management schemes and find suitable technique to design a system.CO5 : Describe disk scheduling algorithms, Secondary storage management techniques, file organization and access

methods.

OPERATING SYSTEM OVERVIEWIntroduction to system software - Objectives and functions of OS - Evolution of OS - Distributed System - Real-Time systems -Operating system components - Interrupts - System call - Virtual Machines - Symmetric Multiprocessing - Microkernel.Macro processor - Features, Design - Linkers - Loaders: Loader schemes. (9)

PROCESS DESCRIPTION AND CONTROLProcess - Process states - Process description - Process control -Processes and Threads - Uniprocessor Scheduling: Types ofProcessor Scheduling - Scheduling Algorithms - Overview of Multiprocessor Scheduling and Real time scheduling. (9)

MUTUAL EXCLUSION AND SYNCHRONIZATIONPrinciples of concurrency - Mutual exclusion: Software and hardware approaches - Semaphores - Monitors - Message Passing- Readers/ Writers problem. Deadlock and Starvation: Principles of deadlock - Deadlock Prevention - Deadlock Detection -Deadlock Avoidance. (9)

MEMORY MANAGEMENTMemory management requirements - Memory partitioning - Loading and Linking - Paging - Segmentation. Virtual Memory:Hardware and control structures - Operating Systems software: Fetch Policy, Placement policy, Replacement policy, Residentset management, Cleaning policy, Load control. (9)

I/O MANAGEMENT AND FILE MANAGEMENTI/O devices - Organization of I/O function - OS design issues - I/O buffering - Disk scheduling. File management: Overview - Fileorganization and access - File directories - File sharing - Record blocking-Secondary storage management. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. William Stallings, "Operating Systems Internals and Design Principles", Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2015. (Operating

System Overview, Process Description and Control, Mutual Exclusion and Synchronization, Memory Management, I/OManagement And File Management)

2. John J Donovan, "System Programming", McGraw Hill Publication, Reprint, 2014. (Other System Software)

REFERENCES1. Leland L.Beck, D.Manjula, "System Software", Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2007.2. Silberchatz, Galvin, Gagne, "Operating System Concepts", John Wiley, 9th Edition, 2013.3. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, David R. Choffnes, "Operating Systems", Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, 2004.

L T P C3 0 0 3

76

15ECE06 - ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Illustrate the characteristics of random processesCO2 : Estimate the frequency spectrum of random signal by using various power spectrum estimation techniquesCO3 : Design a Wiener filter to produce minimum mean square estimate for linear prediction and Develop an adaptive filter

algorithms for real time signal processing applicationCO4 : Analyze the spectral characteristics of sample rate converted discrete time signals by using interpolation and

decimationCO5 : Design filter bank with different structure for computation complexity reduction

DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSINGDiscrete Random Processes - Ensemble averages, Gaussian process, Stationary processes, Autocorrelation and Autocovariancematrices, Ergodicity, Parseval's Theorem - Wiener-Khintchine Theorem - Power Spectrum, Filtering random processes, SpectralFactorization. (9)

SPECTRUM ESTIMATIONEstimation of spectra from finite duration signals, Non-Parametric Methods -Periodogram, Modified Periodogram, Bartlett andWelch methods, Blackman-Tukey method - Parametric Methods - AR, MA, and ARMA model based spectral estimation - FrequencyEstimation. (9)

LINEAR PREDICTION AND FILTERINGLinear prediction - Forward and backward predictions - Solutions of the Normal equations - Levinson - Durbin algorithms - LeastMean Squared error criterion -FIR Wiener filter- IIR Wiener filter - FIR adaptive filters-LMS Algorithm (9)

MULTIRATE SYSTEMReview of Sampling theorem - Sub-Nyquist sampling-Basic Multirate operations - up sampling and down sampling - time domainand frequency domain analysis - Identities of Multirate operations; Interpolator and decimator design - Rate conversion. (9)

FILTER BANKSMultirate Filter Banks: Maximally decimated filter banks - Quadrature mirror filter (QMF) banks - Polyphase representation - Filterbanks with tree structure - Filter banks with parallel structure - Polyphase structures: Fundamentals of Polyphase structures -Polyphase QMF Banks - Polyphase filter Banks (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Monson H.Hayes, "Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling", John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2009.2. N.J.Fliege, "Multirate Digital Signal Processing", John Wiley, 2000.

REFERENCES1. Simon Haykin, "Adaptive Filter Theory", 4th Edition, Pearson Education,20082. John G.Proakis et.al, "Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing", Pearson Education, 2003.3. T.Adali and Simon Haykin, "Adaptive Signal Processing - Next Generation Solutions", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2010.4. P. P. Vaidyanathan, "Multirate Systems and Filter Banks", Prentice Hall, PTR, 1993.5. Fredric J Harris, "Multirate signal Processing For Communication Systems", 1st Edition, Pearson Education ,2007

L T P C3 0 0 3

77

15ECE07 - SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the concepts of speech productionCO2 : Analyze the time domain parameters for speech processingCO3 : Analyze the frequency domain methods for speech processingCO4 : Illustrate the Linear Predictive analysis with its parameters for speech processingCO5 : Infer the concepts of speech processing for real time applications

MECHANICS OF SPEECHSpeech production: Mechanism of speech production, Acoustic phonetics - Digital models for speech signals - Representationsof speech waveform: Sampling speech signals, basics of quantization, delta modulation, and Differential PCM (9)

TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSINGTime domain parameters of Speech signal - Methods for extracting the parameters Energy, Average Magnitude, Zero crossingRate - Silence Discrimination using ZCR and energy - Short Time Auto Correlation Function - Pitch period estimation using AutoCorrelation Function. (9)

FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHOD FOR SPEECH PROCESSINGShort Time Fourier analysis: Fourier transform and linear filtering interpretations, Sampling rates - Spectrographic displays -Pitch and formant extraction - Analysis by Synthesis - Analysis synthesis systems: Phase vocoder, Channel Vocoder - Homomorphicspeech analysis: Cepstral analysis of Speech, Formant and Pitch Estimation, Homomorphic Vocoders. (9)

LINEAR PREDICTIVE ANALYSIS OF SPEECHBasic Principles of linear predictive analysis - Auto correlation method - Covariance method - Solution of LPC equations -Cholesky method - Durbin's Recursive algorithm - Application of LPC parameters - Pitch detection using LPC parameters -Formant analysis - VELP. (9)

APPLICATION OF SPEECH & AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSINGAlgorithms: Dynamic time warping, K-means clustering and Vector quantization, Gaussian mixture modeling, hidden Markovmodeling - Automatic Speech Recognition: Command and Control application: Voice Repertory Dialer, Automated Call typeRecognition, Call Distribution by Voice Commands, Credit Card Sales Validation. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schaffer, "Digital Processing of Speech signals", Prentice Hall, 2004.2. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, "Speech and Audio Signal Processing", John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2006.

REFERENCES1. Thomas F.Quatieri, "Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing-Principles and Practice", Pearson Education, 2004.2. L.R. Rabiner and B. H. Juang, "Fundamentals of speech recognition", Pearson Education,2003.3. Owens, F.J. "Signal Processing of Speech", McGraw-Hill, 1993.4. Claudi Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti,"Speech Recognition", John Wiley and Sons, 1999.5. John R Deller and John H L Hansen, John G Proakis,"Discrete Time Processing of Speech Signals",Wliey-IEEE Press,2000

L T P C3 0 0 3

78

15ECE08 - ADVANCED PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Assess its performance, and apply design techniques to enhance performance using Parallel Processing.CO2 : Examine the principles of pipelining and illustrate the concepts of vector processing in processor.CO3 : Interpret the concepts of structures and algorithms for array processor in a processor.CO4 : Illustrate the concepts of Multiprocessor Architecture, programming, Control and choose scheduling algorithms to

model real time Systems.CO5 : Interpret the processor architecture and system configuration for integrating external devices for MSP 430

microcontroller and TMS320 processor.

PARALLEL PROCESSING, MEMORY AND INPUT-OUTPUT SUBSYSTEMSTrends towards Parallel Processing - Parallel Computer Structures - Architectural Classification Schemes - Parallel ProcessingApplications - Hierarchical Memory Structure - Virtual Memory System - Cache memories - Input-Output subsystems. (9)

PRINCIPLES OF PIPELINING AND VECTOR PROCESSINGPrinciples of Linear Pipelining- Classification of Pipeline Processors - General Pipelines and Reservation Tables- InterleavedMemory Organizations - Principles of Designing Pipelined Processors- Characteristics of Vector Processing - Pipelined VectorProcessing Methods - Architecture of Cray-I Vector Processor. (9)

STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS FOR ARRAY PROCESSORSSIMD Array Processors: SIMD Computer Organization - Masking the Data Routing Mechanism. SIMD Interconnection Networks:Static Vs Dynamic Networks - Mesh-Connected Illiac Network - Cube Interconnection Networks - Barrel Shifter and Data Manipulator- Parallel Algorithms for Array Processors: SIMD Matrix Multiplication - Parallel Storing on Array Processors and SIMD FastFourier Transform. (9)

MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE, PROGRAMMING, CONTROL AND ALGORITHMSLoosely Coupled Multiprocessors - Tightly Coupled Multiprocessors-Processor Characteristics for Multiprocessing. InterconnectionNetworks: Time shared or Common Buses - Crossbar Switch and Multiport Memories - Inter-process Communication Mechanisms:Process Synchronization Mechanisms - Synchronization with Semaphores - Conditional Critical Sections and Monitors - SystemDeadlocks and Protection - Deadlock Prevention and Avoidance - Deadlock Detection and Recovery and Protection schemes.

(9)MS320C6xxx DSP PROCESSORTMS320C6000 Family Overview - Typical Applications - TMS320C67xx DSP Processor Features - Architecture - CPU DataPaths - Functional Units - On-chip Peripherals: DMA - EDMA - HPI - McBSP and Timers. (9)

TOTAL: 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Kai Hwang and Faye A. Briggs, "Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing", McGraw-Hill Publications, 1st Edition,

2012.2. B. Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, "Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming & Applications", Tata McGraw Hill

Publications, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2011.

L T P C3 0 0 3

79

REFERENCES1. By John L. Hennessy, David A. Patterson, " Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach", Elsevier publications, 5th

Edition, 2012.2. http://www.ti.com/lit/ug/spru197d/spru197d.pdf.3. http://www.ti.com/lit/ug/spru733a/spru733a.pdf.

80

15ECE09 - AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Design modules for hybrid vehicle using automotive system components.CO2 : Modify the automobile Electronic Engine Control to improve fuel economy, safety and comfort in Automobiles as per

the government test procedures.CO3 : Design control system in automotives by appropriate choice of Sensors and actuators.CO4 : Determine the vehicle parameters to control engine functioning and interpret vehicle's self-diagnostic codes.CO5 : Examine internal communication network that interconnects the components inside a vehicle to reduce the fatal

accidents and delays

AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE SYSTEMSBasics of the gasoline (SI) engine - Method of operation, Fuel supply - Fuel delivery with manifold injection, Fuel delivery withgasoline direct injection - Inductive ignition system - Design, Function and method of operation - Spark plugs - Function, usage,electrode - Transmission System: Manual, Automatic Transmission - Differential - Braking system - Steering system - Rack andpinion, power steering - Electronic systems: Starting system, Charging system - Hybrid Electric Vehicle Power train Control. (9)

ELECTRONICS IN AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMSNeed for Electronic Engine Control - Exhaust Emissions - Fuel Economy - Federal Government Test Procedures - Concept of anElectronic Engine Control System - Exhaust Catalytic Converters - Electronic Fuel Control System - Open-Loop Control, closed-Loop Control - Analysis of Intake Manifold Pressure - Idle Speed Control - Electronic Ignition System - Electronic SuspensionSystem - Electronic Steering Control - Antilock Braking System - Safety & Comfort systems: Night Vision, Airbags and Seatbeltpre-tensioner. (9)

AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS & ACTUATORSAutomotive engine control sensors: Air Flow Rate Sensor, Engine Crankshaft and Camshaft Position Sensor - Throttle AngleSensor - Intake & Exhaust Temperature - Rail Pressure - Cylinder Pressure & boost pressure Sensors - Sensors for FeedbackControl: lambda sensor, Knock Sensors - Automotive Engine Control Actuators: Throttle actuator - Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) - Oil pump - VVT valve. (9)

AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION AND DIAGNOSTICSModern Automotive Instrumentation - Display Devices - LED, LCD, Transmissive LCD, VFD, Flat Panel Display. Measurements:Fuel Quantity, Coolant Temperature, Oil Pressure, Vehicle Speed - Trip Information Computer - Telematics - Diagnostics: OnboardDiagnostics Model - Diagnostic Fault Codes - Onboard Diagnosis (OBD II) (9)

VEHICLE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLSVehicle Communication Protocols: CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. William B. Ribbens, Ph.D, "Understanding Automotive Electronics", Elsevier Publications, 7th Edition, 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

81

REFERENCES1. William B. Ribbens, Ph.D, "Understanding Automotive Electronics", Elsevier Publications, 6th Edition, 2003.2. BOSCH Automotive Handbook, 8th Edition3. Konard Reif,"Gasolin Engine Management",Systems and Components, Springer FachmedienWiesbaden 20154. Denton. T, "Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems", 3rd Edition, SAE (Society for Automobile Engineers) International,

2004.5. Jack Erjavec, "Automotive Technology: A Systems Approach", Delmar Cengage Learning, 5th Edition, 20096. Barry Hollembeak, "Today's Technician: Automotive Electricity and Electronics (Classroom manual)", Delmar Cengage

Learning, 4th Edition, 2006.

82

15ECE10 - WEARABLE SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Categorize and explain the type of sensors used in wearable systems.CO2 : Analyze the wearability issues in signal processing.CO3 : Specify the types of energy harvesting methods for wearable devices.CO4 : Explain the techniques used in wireless health systems.CO5 : List out and explain the applications of wearable systems.

SENSORSNeed for wearable systems- Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement sensors- Respiration activity sensor- Inductiveplethysmography- Impedance plethysmography- Pneumography- Wearable ground reaction force sensor- GSR- Radiant thermalsensor- Wearable motion sensors- CMOS - Based Biosensors- E-Textiles- Bio compatibility. (9)

SIGNAL PROCESSINGWearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor- Technical challenges - sensor design- signal acquisition- Constrainton sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption- light weight signal processing- Rejection of irrelevant information- Datamining. (9)

ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE DEVICESSolar cell- Vibration based- Thermal based- Human body as a heat source for power generation- Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaicenergy harvests- Thermopiles. (9)

WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMSNeed for wireless monitoring- Definition of Body area network- BAN and Healthcare- Technical Challenges- System security andreliability- BAN Architecture - Introduction- Wireless communication techniques. (9)

APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMSMedical Diagnostics- Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease- Hospital patients- Elderly patients- Multi parametermonitoring- Neural recording- Gait analysis- Sports Medicine- Smart Fabrics (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Annalisa Bonfiglio,DaniloDe Rossi, "Wearable Monitoring Systems", Springer,2011.2. Sandeep K.S. Gupta,Tridib Mukherjee, Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, "Body Area Networks Safety,Security, and

Sustainability", Cambridge University Press, 2013.

REFERENCES1. Hang,Yuan-Ting, "Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems",Springer, 2013.2. Mehmet R. Yuce,JamilY.Khan, "Wireless Body Area Networks Technology, Implementation and Applications",Pan Stanford

Publishing Pvt.Ltd, Singapore, 2012.3. Guang-Zhong Yang(Ed.), "Body Sensor Networks", Springer, 2007.4. Andreas Lymberis, Danilo de Rossi , "Wearable eHealth systems for Personalised Health Management - State of the art

and future challenges", IOS press, The Netherlands, 2004.

L T P C3 0 0 3

83

15ECE11 - SOFT COMPUTING AND APPLICATIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Evaluate and Apply various soft computing frame worksCO2 : Design neural networks and training algorithms for applicationsCO3 : Develop fuzzy systems using fuzzy logicCO4 : Apply genetic programming for optimization problemsCO5 : Design hybrid soft computing techniques.

ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK & FUZZY LOGICArtificial neural network: Introduction, characteristics- learning methods - taxonomy - Evolution of neural networks- basic models- important technologies - applications.Fuzzy logic: Introduction - crisp sets- fuzzy sets - crisp relations and fuzy relations: cartesian product of relation - classicalrelation, fuzzy relations, tolerance and equivalence relations, non-iterative fuzzy sets. Genetic algorithm- Introduction - biologicalbackground - traditional optimization and search techniques - Genetic basic concepts. (9)

NEURAL NETWORKSMcCulloch-Pitts neuron - linear separability - hebb network - supervised learning network: perceptron networks - adaptive linearneuron, multiple adaptive linear neuron, BPN, RBF, TDNN- associative memory network: auto-associative memory network,hetero-associative memory network, BAM, hopfield networks, iterative autoassociative memory network & iterative associativememory network - unsupervised learning networks: Kohonen self organizing feature maps, LVQ - CP networks, ART network.

(9)FUZZY SYSTEMSMembership functions: features, fuzzification, methods of membership value assignments-Defuzzification: lambda cuts - methods- fuzzy arithmetic and fuzzy measures: fuzzy arithmetic - extension principle - fuzzy measures - measures of fuzziness -fuzzyintegrals - fuzzy rule base and approximate reasoning : truth values and tables, fuzzy propositions, formation of rules-decompositionof rules, aggregation of fuzzy rules, fuzzy reasoning-fuzzy inference systems-overview of fuzzy expert system-fuzzy decisionmaking. (9)

GENETIC ALGORITHMGenetic algorithm and search space - general genetic algorithm - operators - Generational cycle - stopping condition - constraints- classification - genetic programming - multilevel optimization - real life problem- advances in GA (9)

HYBRID SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES & APPLICATIONSNeuro-fuzzy hybrid systems - genetic neuro hybrid systems - genetic fuzzy hybrid and fuzzy genetic hybrid systems - simplifiedfuzzy ARTMAP - Applications: A fusion approach of multispectral images with SAR, optimization of traveling salesman problemusing genetic algorithm approach, soft computing based hybrid fuzzy controllers. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2011.2. J.S.R.Jang, C.T. Sun and E.Mizutani, "Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing", PHI / Pearson Education 2004.

L T P C3 0 0 3

84

REFERENCES1. S.Rajasekaran and G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis & Applications",

Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2006.2. George J. Klir, Ute St. Clair, Bo Yuan, "Fuzzy Set Theory: Foundations and Applications" , Prentice Hall, 1997.3. David E. Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in Search Optimization and Machine Learning" Pearson Education India, 2013.4. James A. Freeman, David M. Skapura, "Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications, and Programming Techniques, Pearson

Education India, 1991.5. Simon Haykin, "Neural Networks Comprehensive Foundation" Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.

85

15ECE12 - MEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Develop the MEMS and Microsystems using fabrication, sensing and actuation mechanisms.CO2 : Design the MEMS goods by using elasticity, stress ,strain and material properties.CO3 : Analyze the characteristics of electrostatic and electromagnetic for designing actuators and motors.CO4 : Examine the concepts of issues in MEMS circuits and systems and to model and devise the CAD for MEMSCO5 : Determine the design conceptions for RF and optical MEMS applications

INTRODUCTION TO MEMSMEMS and Micro systems - Miniaturization - Typical products - Micro sensors - Micro actuation - MEMS with micro actuators-Micro accelerometers - Micro Fluidics - MEMS materials - Microfabrication (9)

MECHANICS FOR MEMS DESIGNElasticity: Stress, Strain and material properties - Bending of thin plates - Spring configurations - Torsional deflection - MechanicalVibration: Resonance - Thermo mechanics - Actuators - Force and response time - Fracture and thin film mechanics. (9)

ELECTROSTATIC AND ELECTROMAGNETIC DESIGN AND SYSTEM ISSUESElectrostatics : Basic theory, Electro Static Instability - Surface Tension-Gap and finger pull up - Electro static actuators - Combgenerators - Gap closer - Rotary motors - Inch worms - Electromagnetic actuators - Bistable actuators - Electronic interfaces -Feedback system - Noise - Circuit and system issues. (9)

MEMS APPLICATIONCase studies - Capacitive accelerometer - Piezo Electric pressure sensor - Micro fluidics application - Modeling of MEMSSystems - CAD for MEMS. (9)

INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL AND RF MEMSOptical MEMS - System design basics: Gaussian optics, Matrix operations, Resolution - Case studies - MEMS Scanners andRetinal Scanning display - Digital Micro Mirror Devices - Optical switches -RF MEMS: Design basics, Case study, capacitive RFMEMS switch, Performance issues. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Stephen Santeria, "Micro systems design", Kluwer publishers, 2001.2. N.P. Mahalik, "MEMS", Tata McGraw Hill, 2007

REFERENCES1. Vijay K. Varadan, K.J. Vinoy, K.A.Jose, "RF MEMS" and their Application" Published by John Wiley & sons Ltd, England,

reprinted April 20032. NadimMaluf and Kirt William, "An introduction to Micro Electromechanical system Engineering", 2nd Edition, Artech House,

20043. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, "The MEMS Hand book-Application", CRC press, 2nd Edition,20064. Tai Ran Hsu, "MEMS & Micro systems Design, Manufacture and Nano scale Engineering" John Wiley and sons, New

Jersey, 2nd Edition, 20085. Jan G. Korvink, Oliver Paul, "MEMS a practical guide of design, analysis and applications", William Andrew, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

86

15ECE13 - POWER ELECTRONICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Illustrate the different types of power semiconductor devices and its dynamic characteristicsCO2 : Explain the operation, characteristics and performance of Controlled Rectifiers.CO3 : Describe the operation, switching techniques and dynamic topologies of DC-DC Switching RegulatorsCO4 : Categorize different modulation techniques of Pulse width modulated inverters and harmonic reduction methodsCO5 : Describe the Operation and configuration of AC Phase Controllers

UNCONTROLLED RECTIFIERSPower Diode - Half wave rectifier - Mid point secondary transformer based full ave rectifier - Bridge rectifier - Voltage doublercircuit - distortion factor - capacitor filter for low power rectifiers - LC filters - Concern for power quality - 3 diode bridge. (9)

CONTROLLED RECTIFIERSTwo transistor analogy based turn- ON behavior - Snubber Circuit - turn ON losses - thermal protection - Half controlled & Fullycontrolled converter (1 & 3) - Displacement factor - RF & HF - pf mitigation, other performance factors - Effect of source inductianceInverter angle limit. (9)

SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIESSCR based step-down & step-up choppers - MOSFET dynamic behavior , Driver & snubber circuits; Low power high switchingfrequency switching Power supplies , Buck, Boost ,Buck- Boost, converters - Isolated topologies - Resonant converters - switchingloss calculations & thermal design. (9)

INVERTERSIGBT - Static dynamic behavior, 1 half bridge and full bridge inverters SCR based six step 3 ? VSI. SCR based ASCI, PWM (bothunipolar & Bipolar) - Third harmonic injected sine pwm - space vector PWM - selective harmonic elimination. (9)

AC PHASE CONTROLLERSTRIAC triggering concept with positive gate pulse & negative gate pulse triggering, TRIAC based phase controllers, SCR based1φ & 3φ ac phase controller - various configurations. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Ned Mohan, T.M.Undeland, W.P.Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, applications and design", John wiley and Sons,

3rd Edition, 2006.2. Rashid M.H., "Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES1. Cyril.W.Lander, "Power Electronics", McGraw Hill International, 3rd Edition, 1993.2. P.S.Bimbra, "Power Electronics", Khanna Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2003.3. Philip T.Krein, "Elements of Power Electronics", Oxford University Press, 20044. B.K.Bose, "Modern Power Electronics", Jaico Publishing House, 5th Edition,19995. M. D. Singh, "Power Electronics", Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008

L T P C3 0 0 3

87

15ECE14 - ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Interpret the basic concepts and issues of Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility.CO2 : Explain the principles and methods of EMI measurements and related instruments.CO3 : Acquire ability to describe about national and international EMI/EMC standards and certifying organizationsCO4 : Compare and summarise the characteristics of EMI control methods with minimum interference.CO5 : Acquire knowledge about EMC Compliant design and Interconnection methods. interference issues

BASIC CONCEPTSDefinition of EMI and EMC with examples - Classification of EMI/EMC - CE, RE, CS, RS, Units of Parameters - Sources of EMI- EMI coupling modes - CM and DM, ESD Phenomena and effects - Transient phenomena and suppression. (9)

EMI MEASUREMENTSBasic principles of RE, CE, RS and CS measurements - EMI measuring instruments : Antennas, LISN, Feed through capacitor,current probe - EMC analyzer and detection technique : open area site, shielded anechoic chamber, TEM cell. (9)

EMC STANDARDS AND REGULATIONSNational and International standardizing organizations : FCC, CISPR, ANSI, DOD, IEC, CENEEC - FCC CE and RE - standards: CISPR, CE and RE Standards, IEC/EN, CS standards - Frequency assignment - spectrum conversation. (10)

EMI CONTROL METHODS AND FIXESShielding - Grounding - Bonding - Filtering - EMI gasket - Isolation transformer - opto isolator. (8)

EMC DESIGN AND INTERCONNECTION TECHNIQUESCable routing and connection - Component selection and mounting - PCB design - Trace routing - Impedance control - decoupling- Zoning and grounding. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Prasad Kodali.V, " Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility ", IEEE Electromagnetic Compatibility Soceity, 2nd Edition,

2001.2. Clayton R.Paul, " Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility ", John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2006.

REFERENCES1. Clayton R. Paul, Keith W. Whites, S. A. Nasar, "Introduction to Electromagnetic Fields", McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 3rd

Edition 2007.2. Kenneth Kaiser , "Electromagnetic Compatibility Handbook", CRC Press, 2004.3. Bruce R. Archambeault, Omar M. Ramahi, Colin Brench, " EMI/EMC Computational Modeling Handbook'' Springer Science,

2013.4. Richard Lee Ozenbaugh, Timothy M. Pullen, "EMI Filter Design", CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2016.5. Xingcun Colin Tong, "Advanced Materials and Design for Electromagnetic Interference Shielding", CRC Press, 2016.

L T P C3 0 0 3

88

15ECE15 - INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Evaluate the information content in a discrete memoryless source through parameters such as entropy and mutual

information.CO2 : Estimate a channel's capacity based on Shannon's channel capacity theoremCO3 : Construct efficient source coding schemes based on the entropy of source and probability of input variablesCO4 : Develop channel error control codes using BCH and RS algorithmsCO5 : Design of various coding techniques for AWGN and fading channels

CONCEPT OF INFORMATION THEORYReview of probability Theory - Random variables - Operations on single and multiple random variables-random process concept-Memoryless Finite Schemes- Self information measure - Entropy function - Conditional Entropies - Characteristics of Entropyfunction - Derivation of the noise characteristics of a channel - Mutual information - Redundancy - Efficiency and channelcapacity - capacities of channels with symmetric noise structure. (9)

CONTINUOUS CHANNELSDefinitions of different entropies - Mutual information - Maximization of the entropy of a continuous random variable - Entropymaximization problems - Channel capacity under the influence of additive white Gaussian Noise- Hartley Shannon's Law - Trade- off between Bandwidth and SNR - Comparison of different modulation methods- Information Capacity Theorem - Rate DistortionTheory. (9)

ELEMENTS OF ENCODINGSeparable binary codes - Shannon - Fano encoding - Necessary and sufficient conditions for noiseless coding - Shannon'sbinary coding - fundamental theorem of discrete noise-less coding - Huffman's code - Gilbert Moore coding - Fundamentaltheorem of discrete coding in presence of noise - Instantaneous Codes - Kraft Inequality and McMillan's Theorem - AverageLength and Compact Codes - Geometric Representation - Arithmetic Coding (9)

ERROR CONTROL CODESHamming's single error correcting code - BCH codes - Reed-Solomon codes - Decoding BCH and RS codes - finding the ErrorLocator Polynomial - Non-binary BCH and RS Decoding - Erasure decoding for Non binary BCH and RS codes -Turbo codes -Encoding Parallel Concatenated codes - Turbo MAP decoding algorithm - BCJR algorithm - Log likelihood ratio decoding (9)

CODING OVER CHANNELSAWGN channels-Coding gain-Encoding and decoding in AWGN channels-ML and MAP decoding for Repetition codes- Codinggain performances -Density Parity check (LDPC) codes, Gallager construction of LDPC codes-Tanner Graphs- Gallager decoding-Degree optimisation to achieve higher thresholds- Soft-decision Message Passing Decoder for AWGN channels-Density evolutionfor AWGN channels (9)

TOTAL: 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Reza F M,"An Introduction to Information theory", McGraw Hill, 2000.2. Todd K Moon, "Error Correction Coding - Mathematical methods and Algorithms", John Wiley & Sons, 2005.

L T P C3 0 0 3

89

REFERENCES1. Richard B.Wells, "Applied Coding and Information Theory for Engineers", Pearson Education, 1st Indian reprint, 2004.2. Ranjan Bose, "Information Theory Coding and Cryptography", Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.3. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2001.4. Roberto Togneri, Christopher J.S DeSilva, "Fundamentals of Information Theory and Coding Design", CRC press, 2003.5. Simon Haykins, " Digital Communications Systems", 1st Edition, Wiley, 2013

90

15ECE16 - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESIGN

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Discuss the characteristics and properties of LTIV systemsCO2 : Analyze the spectral characteristics of discrete time signals by using filters and analyze the sample rate converted

discrete time signals by interpolation and decimationCO3 : Outline different bandpass modulation & demodulation techniques and compare their performanceCO4 : Apply channel coding procedure and calculate coding efficiencyCO5 : Analyze the performance of Spread Spectrum and OFDM system

INTRODUCTIONBasics of LabVIEW - LabVIEW Coding Guidelines - Generating Signals - Generating Channel Models - Generating Symbols -Examples of Time Varying Systems- Models for LTIV Systems -Time Domain Description for LTIV System - Frequency DomainDescription of LTIV Systems - Properties of LTIV Systems - Random Process Models - Channel Modeling and Simulation. (9)

FFT AND DIGITAL FILTERSSpectral Analysis using FFT, FIR Filters - Sampling - Quantization: Uniform Quantization, Non-uniform Quantization, QuantizationErrors - FIR Filter Design by Windowing, Equi-ripple FIR Filters - Effects of Filter-Phase Response - Pulse-Shaping Filter -Upsampling - Downsampling - Resampling Filters: Halfband Filters, Polyphase Filters. (9)

BANDPASS DIGITAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTIONFrequency Shift Keying (FSK) - Phase Modulation - Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK) - QuadratureAmplitude Modulation (QAM) - M-ary keying- Comparison of Various Signaling - Signal Detection and Recovery: Matched filterdetection, Threshold decisions - Performance Measurements- Bit-error rate, Error vector magnitude. (9)

CHANNEL CODINGWaveform Coding, Linear Block Coding, Cyclic Coding - Convolutional Coding and Viterbi Decoding - Trellis - Coded Modulation(TCM) - Turbo Coding -Low-Density Parity-Check (LDPC) Coding - Differential Space - Time Block Coding (DSTBC) (9)

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMPerformance analysis Spread Spectrum System, OFDM System - Simulation and Modeling (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Cory L.Clark, "Digital Signal Processing and Digital Communication using Labview", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi, 2005.2. Robert W. Heath J., "Digital Communication Physical Layer Exploration Lab Using the NI USRP", National Technology &

Science Press, 2012

REFERENCES1. Won Y. Yang, Yong S. Cho, Won G. Jeon, Jeong W. Lee, Jong H. Paik Jae K. Kim, Mi-Hyun Lee, Kyu I. Lee, Kyung W. Park

and Kyung S. Woo, "MATLAB/Simulink for Digital Communication", A-Jin Publishing Co, 20092. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2009.3. LabVIEW Basics-I Manual, National Instruments, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

91

4. William H. Tranter, K. Sam Shanmugan, Theodore S. Rappaport and Kurt L. Kosbar Principles of Communication SystemsSimulation with Wireless Applications, Prentice Hall, 2004.

5. K. C. Raveendranathan, "Communication Systems Modelling and Simulation: Using MATLAB and Simulink", UniversitiesPress (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad (AP), 2011.

6. Michel C. Jeruchim, Philip Balaban and K. Sam Shanmugan, "Simulation of Communication Systems", Plenum Press,New York, 1992.

92

15ECE17 - MODERN ANTENNAS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : a. Explain the concept and applications of PIFA, Helical & Ceramic chip antennas

b. Illustrate SAR value measurement & minimization methods for mobile handset.CO2 : a. Categorize Fractal structures

b. Design and explain radiation parameters of simple Fractal antenna.CO3 : a. Categorize antennas for millimeter wave and sub-millimeter wave applications based on their operating frequency

b. Explain the concept and radiation parameters of Waveguide, Printed planar, Vivaldi antennas & long slot arrayCO4 : Explain the techniques for broad impedance bandwidth & enhanced radiation performance and applications in high

speed wireless communicationCO5 : Derive and describe narrowband beam processing techniques for smart antenna such as Conventional, Null steering

& Optimal beam former and Optimal beam space processor.

MOBILE HANDESET ANTENNASReview of antenna basic parameters - Frequency bands for commercial applications - Cellular handset antenna design issues -Helical wire antennas and variants - Evolution of the PIFA - Ceramic chip and resonator antennas - SAR measurement andminimization - Provision for GPS and Bluetooth (9)

FRACTAL ANTENNASFractal antenna geometries - Iterated function systems - Fractal antenna elements - Radiation characteristics - Fractal antennaarrays - Antenna arrays based on aperiodic tilings. (9)

MILLIMETER WAVE ANTENNASMillimeter wave and Terahertz applications - Waveguide antennas - Printed planar antennas - On-chip antennas - Sub millimeterwave antennas - Vivaldi antenna & long slot array for ultra wideband characteristics. (9)

BROADBAND PLANAR ANTENNASuspended plate antennas - Techniques for broad impedance bandwidth - Techniques for enhanced radiation performance -Planar monopole antennas - Applications in high speed wireless communications (9)

SMART ANTENNASBeam steering - Degree of freedom - Key benefits of smart antennas technology - Narrow band processing: Signal model-Conventional beam former-Null steering beam former-Optimal beam former-Optimization using reference signal-Optimal beamspace processor. (9)

TOTAL: 45TEXT BOOK1. John.L.Volakis, "Antenna Engineering Handbook", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2007.

REFERENCES1. Constantine A.Balanis, "Modern Antenna Handbook", John Wiley and Sons, 2008.2. S.Drabowitch, A.Papiernik ,et.al, "Modern Antennas", Springer, 2nd Edition, 2005.3. Zhi Ning Chen, "Antennas for Portable Devices", John Wiley & Sons, 2007.4. Lal Chand Godara, "Smart Antennas", C.R.C Press, 2004.5. John D Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan,"Antennas for all applications", John Wiley and Sons, 3rd Edition,

New York, 2002.

L T P C3 0 0 3

93

15ECE18 - RF MICROELECTRONICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Examine transceiver architecture and analyse RF components for effective transmission and ReceptionCO2 : Analyse impedance matching issues in Low Noise Amplifiers, mixers and Gilbert Cells.CO3 : Categorize and explain oscillators for RF Signal generationCO4 : Describe Phase detectors, charge pumps ans synthesizers and infer stability issuesCO5 : Assess the impedance matching issues in power amplifier during large signal power amplification

TRANSCEIVER ARCHITECTURES Heterodyne and Homodyne architectures - Direct conversion Transceiver-Low IF receiver - Discrete and CMOS realization ofpassive components for RF - Distortion - IP3 - Blockers and Blocker Filtering - Friis Formula for cascaded blocks. (9)

CMOS LNAS AND MIXERSNoise Figure and impedance matching issues -Common Source Amplifier - Common Gate Amplifier and differential LNAs -Passive mixers - Active mixers - Gilbert cells - linearity and Noise Figure of mixers (9)

OSCILLATORSLC Resonator- Analysis of Oscillator as Feedback System-Negative Resistance generated by amplifier - Basic differential oscillatortopologies - Modified Common-Collector Colpitts' Oscillator with Buffering-Phase Noise. (9)

FREQUENCY SYNTHESIS

PLL Components-Continuous Time Analysis for PLL Synthesizers-Discrete Time Analysis for PLL Synthesizers-Transient Behaviorof PLLs-Fractional-N PLL Frequency Synthsizers. (9)

POWER AMPLIFIERSClass A, B , C , D , E ,F and AB power amplifiers - Summary of Amplifier classes for RF Integrated Circuits -Matching to achievedesired power- Effects and Implication of Non- Linearity (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. John Rogers and Calvin Plett, "Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design", Artech House, 2002.2. B. Razavi - "RF Microelectronics" - Pearson Education, 2nd Edition - 2013.3. Thomas Lee - "The Design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits"- Cambridge University Press - 2nd Edition -

2004.

REFERENCES1. Ken Kuang, Franklin Kim, Sean S. Cahill,"RF and Microwave Microelectronics Packaging", Springer New York, 2009.2. Serge Luryi, Jimmy Xu, Alex Zaslavsky, "Future Trends in Microelectronics: Up the Nano Creek", John Wiley & sons, 3rd

Edition, 2007.3. Marian K. Kazimerczuk,"RF power amplifiers" Prentice Hall, 20084. Guillermo Bistue, Carlos Quemada, Inigo Adin, "Design Methodology for RF CMOS phase locked loops",Artech house,20095. Chengzhi Zhou,"RF passives and Antennas on three -dimensional metalized substrates", 2007

L T P C3 0 0 3

94

15ECE19 - REAL TIME CONTROLLERS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Interpret the concepts and compare the characteristics of real - time systems to choose the architecture of a Real

time Controller for an application.CO2 : Infer the architecture and Instruction set of C2000 Processor to develop Assembly language programsCO3 : Appraise the data format, Addressing modes, Pipelining and Interrupt handler of C2000 processor for real time

constraintsCO4 : Determine the concepts of Energy estimation techniques in Real time SystemsCO5 : Examine the communication protocols for real time applications

REAL TIME ENVIORMENTReal Time Systems -Types of Real Time systems - Hard and Soft, Real Time Event Characteristics, Challenges in Real TimeSystem Design - Distributed and Multi-processor Architecture - Embedded systems and its characteristics (9)

ARCHITECTURE OF TI C2000Software Development and the Process - Assembler Directives - C2000 Architecture - Central Processing Unit - Program Control- Programming and System Issues - Phase Locked Loop Application. (9)

DEPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONSData Representation and Arithmetic - Fixed Point vs Floating Point Format - Finite Word Length Effects - Addressing Modes -Pipeline - Instruction Cache - Interrupts - Hardware and Software - Real Time Implementation Considerations. (9)

ENERGY EFFICIENT REAL TIME SYSTEMSBasic Concepts of Energy Efficiency and its Estimates - Thermal Effects - Reliability - Hardware Techniques - Power Reduction- Low Power Design - Power Gating - Real Time - Execution Time - Software Techniques- Software Tools - Energy Sources -Batteries - Energy Harvesting. (9)

REAL TIME COMMUNICATIONCommunication Requirements - Timeliness - Dependability - Design Issues - Flow Control and Thrashing - Event TriggeredCommunication - Ethernet - Controller Area Network - User Datagram Protocol - Token Protocol - Time triggered communication- Flexray - Control Law Accelerators - Fixed Point Libraries (iQMath). (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOK1. Hermann Kopetz , "Real Time Systems: Design Principles for Distributed Embedded Applications", Springer publications,

2nd Edition, 2011

REFERENCES1. Robert Oshana,"DSP Software Development Techniques for Embedded and Real-Time Systems",Newnes publication, 1st

Edition, 20062. Sen M Kuo and WoongSenGan, "Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Implementations and Applications", Prentice

Hall,1st Edition, 20043. C2000 Teaching CD ROM from Texas Instruments4. TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide, TI Literature Number: SPRU 430E, revised in 20165. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx DSP Peripheral Reference Guide, TI Literature Number: SPRU566J, revised in 2016

L T P C3 0 0 3

95

15ECE20 - NANO ELECTRONICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Interpret the concepts of diverse Electron microscopes based on their construction techniques.CO2 : Infer the formation and properties of nanotube and identify the appropriate structure of nano tubes for memory

application.CO3 : Infer the concepts of Quantum physics, Quantum electronic devices and apply them in Quantum

computers.CO4 : Illustrate the features of diverse Logic devices and reconstruct the single electron device for logic applications.CO5 : Use nano bio sensors and develop sensor based medical devices

BACKGROUND TO NANOTECHNOLOGYTypes of nanotechnology and nano machines - Periodic table - Atomic structure - Molecules and phases - energy - Molecularand atomic size - Surface and dimensional space - Top down and bottom up - Molecular nanotechnology: Electron microscope- scanning electron microscope - Atomic force microscope - Scanning tunneling microscope-Nano materials - Preparation -Plasma arcing - Chemical vapor deposition - solgels - Electro deposition - Ball milling -Applications of nanomaterials. (9)

CARBON NANOTUBESNew forms of carbon-Fullerenes - Types of nanotubes - Formation of nanotubes - Assemblies -Electronic properties - Synthesisof carbon nanotubes - Carbon nanotube FETs - Nanotube for memory applications - Prospects of carbon nanotube innanoelectronics. (9)

FUNDAMENTALS OF NANO ELECTRONICSThe tool of Micro and nano fabrication-From classical to Quantum physics- Quantum electronic devices-Quantum informationand Quantum computers-Experimental Implementations of Quantum Computers. (9)

LOGIC DEVICESSilicon MOSFETS novel materials and alternate concepts-Fundamentals of MOSFET Devices- Nano Electromechanical Logicgates-Single Electron Devices for Logic applications-Electron wave guide devices-Super conductor Digital electronics. (9)

EVOLVING INTERFACES OF NANOApplications of Nano in Biology: Nano Sensors: Nano scale organization for sensors, Nano Bio Sensors - Nano Medicine: NanoTechnology in diagnostic applications - Approach to Developing Nano Medicines. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOK1. Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons and Burkhard Raguse, "Nanotechnology: Basic

Science and Emerging Technologies", Chapman & Hall / CRC, 2002

REFERENCES1. Rainer Waser (Ed.), "Nanoelectronics and Information Technology : Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices",

3rd Edition, Wiley-VCH, 20122. T. Pradeep, "NANO: The Essentials - Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology", McGraw Hill, 2007.3. George W. Hanson, "Fundamentals of Nano electronics", 1st Edition, Pearson Educationl, 20084. Shunrioda, David Ferry, "Silicon Nano electronics", Taylor and Francis group, CRC 2005.5. Karl Goser, Peter Glosekotter, Jan Dienstuhl, "Nano electronics and Nano system: From transistors to molecular and

quantum Devices", Springer 2004

L T P C3 0 0 3

96

15ECE21 - ROBOTICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the concepts of robotics, safety measures and homogeneous transformation.CO2 : Formulate the concepts of mechanical drives in robotics.CO3 : Exemplify the features and functionalities of the sensors in Robot.CO4 : Develop robotics programming, classifications and it applications.CO5 : Illustrate the methodologies in robot task planning and problem solving techniques.

ROBOT KINEMATICSIntroduction - Robotics and programmable automation - Historical background - Laws of Robotics - Robot definitions - Roboticssystem and Robot anatomy - Specifications of Robots - Safety measures in Robotics. Robot kinematics - forward and reversekinematics of three and four degrees of freedom robot arm - Homogeneous transformation - Kinematics equations usinghomogeneous transformation. (9)

ROBOTIC DRIVERS AND CONTROLSRobot drives, actuators and control - Functions of drive systems - General types of fluids - Pump classification - Pneumaticsystems - Electrical drives - DC motors - Stepper motors - Drive mechanism. Robot end effectors - Classification - Drive systemfor grippers - Mechanical grippers - Magnetic grippers - Vacuum grippers - Adhesive grippers - Gripper force analysis and gripperdesign. (9)

LOW LEVEL AND HIGH LEVEL SENSORSSensors and intelligent robots. Artificial intelligence and automated manufacturing - AI and robotics - Need for sensing systems- Sensory device - Types of sensors - Robot vision systems - Low level vision and high level vision. (9)

ROBOTIC LANGUAGE AND PROGRAMMINGRobot language and programming.Robot language - Classification of Robot languages - Computer control and robot software -VAL system and language. Application of Robots : Capabilities of Robots - Robotics applications - Obstacle avoidance. (9)

ANALYSIS AND TASK PLANNINGRobot intelligence and task planning - State space search problem reduction - Use of predicate logic - Means and Ends analysis- Problem solving - Robot learning - Robot task planning - Basic problems in task planning (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Satya Ranjan Deb, "Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2012.2. Mikell P. Groover, M. Weiss, R.N. Nagal, N.G. Odrey, "Industrial Robotics", McGraw Hill International, 2nd Edition, 2012.

REFERENCES1. Fairhurst, Michaeloc, "Computer Vision for Robotics systems - An introduction", Prentice Hall, 1990.2. Mikell P. Groover, "Automation Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2004.3. NelloZuech, "Understanding and Applying Machine Vision", Marcell Dekker Inc., 2nd Edition, 2000.4. Ramesh Jain, RangacharKasturi, and Brain G. Sehunk, "Machine Vision", Mc Graw Hill International Edition, 1995.

L T P C3 0 0 3

97

15ECE22 - PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the architecture of models of parallel computersCO2 : Illustrate the key concepts of advanced processor and memory hierarchy technologyCO3 : Exemplify the types of pipelining methods for super scalar architectureCO4 : Interpret the models, languages and compilers for parallel programmingCO5 : Infer the concepts of distributed systems.

PARALLEL ARCHITECTUREParallel Computer Models - Program and Network properties - Principles of scalable performance (9)

PROCESSORS AND MEMORY HIERARCHY, BUSAdvanced processor Technology - Super scalar and vector processor - Memory hierarchy technology - Virtual Memory Technology- Backplane Bus systems. (9)

PIPELINING AND SUPER SCALAR TECHNIQUESLinear Pipeline - Nonlinear pipeline - Instruction pipeline - Arithmetic pipeline - Superscalar and super pipeline design - Paralleland scalable architectures - Multiprocessor and Multicomputers. (9)

SOFTWARE FOR PARALLEL PROGRAMMINGParallel programming models - languages - compliers - Parallel Program Development and Environments. (9)

DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMSModels - Hardware concepts - Communication - Synchronization mechanism - Case study : MPI and PVM - Distributed filesystems. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Hwang. K, “Advanced computer Architecture, Parallelism, scalability, Programmability”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1993.2. Tanenbaum A.S, “Distributed Operating Systems”, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.

REFERENCES1. Dezso Sima,Terence Fountain, Peter Kacsuk, “Advanced Computer Architectures”, Pearson Education, 2007.2. V. Rajaraman and C.Siva Ram Murthy, “Parallel Computers Architecture and Programming”, PHI, 2000.3. Quinn, M.J., “Designing Efficient Algorithms for Parallel Computers”, McGraw - Hill, 2003.4. Culler, D.E., “Parallel Computer Architecture, A Hardware - Software approach”, Harcourt Asia Pte.Ltd., 1999.

L T P C3 0 0 3

98

15ECE23 - COGNITIVE RADIO COMMUNICATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Discuss the evolution of Software defined radioCO2 : Analyze the architecture of Software defined radioCO3 : Outline the evolution of Cognitive radioCO4 : Analyze the architecture of Cognitive radioCO5 : Analyze the next generation networks , spectrum utilization and layer issues

SDR EVOLUTIONDefinitions and potential benefits - software radio architecture evolution - foundations - technology tradeoffs and architectureimplications - Antenna for Cognitive Radio (9)

SDR ARCHITECTUREEssential functions of the software radio - architecture goals - quantifying degrees of programmability - top level componenttopology - computational properties of functional components - interface topologies among plug and play modules - architecturepartitions (9)

INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE RADIOSMarking radio self-aware - cognition cycle - organization of cognition tasks - structuring knowledge for cognition tasks - Enablinglocation and environment awareness in cognitive radios - concepts - architecture - design considerations (9)

COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTUREPrimary Cognitive Radio functions - Behaviors - Components - A-Priori Knowledge taxonomy - observe - phase data structures- Radio procedure knowledge encapsulation - components of orient - plan - decide phases - act phase knowledge representation- design rules (9)

NEXT GENERATION (XG) WIRELESS NETWORKSThe XG Network architecture - spectrum sensing - spectrum management - spectrum mobility - spectrum sharing - upper- layerissues - cross-layer design (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, and Y. Thomas Hou, "Cognitive Radio Communications and Networks - Principles

and Practice", Elsevier Inc., 2010.2. Huseyin Arslan , "Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio and Adaptive wireless system, Springer, 1st Edition, 2007.

REFERENCES1. Bruce A Fette, "Cognitive Radio Technology", Academic Press, 2009.2. E. Biglieri, A.J. Goldsmith., L.J. Greenstein, N.B. Mandayam, H.V. Poor, “Principles of Cognitive Radio", Cambridge University

Press, 2013.3. Kwang- Cheng Chen and Ramjee Prasad, " Cognitive Radio Networks" , John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2009.4. Khattab, Ahmed, Perkins, Dmitri, Bayoumi, Magdy, "Cognitive Radio Networks - From Theory to Practice", Springer Series:

Analog Circuits and Signal Processing, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

99

15ECE24 - WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Outline the challenges & issues in the wireless Ad Hoc and sensor network and its subsystems and interpret network

architecture and its componentsCO2 : Describe the essential principles of the MAC protocols for Wireless Ad Hoc NetworksCO3 : Elucidate the Routing & Transport protocols for Wireless Ad Hoc NetworksCO4 : Discuss the features of MAC & Routing protocols for WSNCO5 : Explain the principles of localization tracking and infrastructure establishment in WSN

FUNDAMENTALS OF AD HOC & SENSOR NETWORKSFundamentals of Wireless Communication Technology - The Electromagnetic Spectrum - Radio propagation Mechanisms -Cellular and Ad Hoc networks (MANETs) - issues in Ad hoc networks - Wireless sensor networks (WSNs): Challenges andConstraints - Single node architecture - Hardware components, energy consumption of sensor nodes - Applications of Ad Hocand Sensor networks. (9)

MAC PROTOCOLS FOR AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKSIssues in designing a MAC Protocol- Classification of MAC Protocols- Contention based protocols: A Media Access Protocol forWireless LAN (MACAW), Busy Tone Multiple Access protocols - Contention based protocols with Reservation Mechanisms:Distributed Packet reservation Multiple Access Protocol (D-PRMA), Collision Avoidance Time Allocation Protocol (CATA), FivePhase reservation Protocol (FPRP) - Contention based protocols with Scheduling Mechanisms: Distributed Priority Schedulingand medium Access in Ad Hoc Networks, Distributed Wireless Ordering protocol (DWOP). (9)

ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND TRANSPORT LAYER IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKSIssues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classifications of Routing Protocols - Table-DrivenRouting Protocols - Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV) - Wireless Routing Protocol (WRP) - Cluster Switch GatewayRouting (CSGR) - Source-Initiated On-Demand Approaches - Ad hoc On-Demand Distance Vector Routing (AODV) - DynamicSource Routing (DSR) -Temporally Ordered Routing Algorithm (TORA) - Signal Stability Routing (SSR) -Location-Aided Routing(LAR) - Power-Aware Routing (PAR) - Zone Routing Protocol (ZRP). (9)

MAC AND ROUTING FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKSMAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks, IEEE 802.15.4, Zigbee, Low Duty Cycle Protocols And Wakeup Concepts - S-MAC , The Mediation Device Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, Address and Name Management, Assignment of MAC Addresses,Routing Protocols- Energy-Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing. (9)

LOCALIZATION TRACKING AND INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENTA Tracking Scenario - Problem formulation - Distributed representation and inference of states- Tracking multiple objects -Sensor models - Topology control - Clustering - Time synchronization - Localization and Localization Services (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S. Manoj, "Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Architectures and Protocols", Pearson Education, 2012.2. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati , Wireless Sensor Networks: Technology, Protocols and Applications, Wiley

Interscience A John Wiley & sons, Inc., Publication, 2007.

L T P C3 0 0 3

100

REFERENCES1. Carlos de Morais Cordeiro , Dharma Prakash Agarwal, "Ad hoc and Sensor Network : Theory and Applications", 2nd

Edition, World Scientific Publishing Co, 2011.2. Holger Karl & Andreas willing, “Protocols and Architectures for wireless sensor Networks”, John Wiley, 2005.3. Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, "Wireless Sensor Networks: An information processing Approach", Elsevier 2004.4. C.K.Toh, "Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks", Pearson Education, 2009.5. Ian F. Akyildiz, Mehmet Can Vuran, " Wireless Sensor Networks" John Wiley, 20106. Yingshu Li, My T. Thai,Weili Wu, " Wireless Sensor Networks and Applications" Springer 2008

101

15ECE25 - WIRELESS NETWORKS AND STANDARDS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : (i) Outline the concepts of TDMA , GSM, CDMA in the Second generation wireless cellular networks

(ii) Describe and compare the air interface techniques in the second generation systems.(iii) Summarize the UMTS Services, air interface techniques, WCDMA and CDMA in the third generation systems

CO2 : Describe the working principles of various wireless standards and its operationsCO3 : Describe the Function of Mobile IP and Outline the various wireless application protocolsCO4 : Outline the various types wireless LANs and Summarize the Wireless LAN StandardsCO5 : Describe the features and operations of various Wireless Personal Area Networks and its standards

SECOND AND THIRD GENERATION: ARCHITECTURE AND PROCESS FLOWSecond Generation TDMA - GSM : Architecture, Air Interface, Channels, Voice-call setup, Hand over - EDGE architecture-Second Generation CDMA: Forward and Reverse channel, Call Handoff - Third Generation systems - UMTS network architecture

(9)WIRELESS SYSTEM OPERATIONS AND STANDARDSCordless systems : Time Division Duplex, DECT Operation, ADPCM- Wireless Local Loop : Propagation considerations for WLL-OFDM -WiMAX and IEEE 802.16 : Broadband Wireless Access Standards: Architecture, Services, MAC Layer, Physical Layer -Long-Term Evolution : System Architecture, Transmission Techniques ,Channels in the radio interface, Radio ResourceManagement (9)

MOBILE IP AND WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOLSMobile IP : Operation of Mobile IP, Discovery using Agent Solicitation , Move Detection ,Co-located addresses - Registration :Securing the Registration Procedure -Tunneling : IP-within-IP Encapsulation, Minimal Encapsulation - Wireless Application Protocol: Architectural Overview, Wireless Markup Language, WML Script, Wireless Application Environment, Wireless Session Protocol,Wireless Transaction Protocol,Wireless Transport Layer Security, Wireless Datagram Protocol (9)

WIRELESS LANSIntroduction - Spread Spectrum LANs : Configuration, Transmission issues - Narrowband Microwave LANs : Licensed NarrowBand RF, Unlicensed narrowband RF - IEEE 802.11: Architecture and services , Wi-Fi alliance, Medium Access Control ,ReliableData Delivery, IEEE 802.11a/b Physical Layer - Introduction to 802.11n - Infrared LANs : Strengths and Weakness, Transmissiontechniques (9)

WPANIntroduction - Radio Specification - Baseband and Specification - Link Manager Specification - Logical Link Control and AdaptationProtocol - IEEE 802.15: IEEE 802.15.3/a, IEEE 802.15.4 - UWB - Optical Wireless Wavelength division Multiplexing (OWWDM).

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Clint Smith, P.E. and Daniel Collins, "3G Wireless Networks", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2007.2. Kaveh Pahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy, "Principles of Wireless networks - A unified Approach", Prentice Hall, 2013.REFERENCES1. William Stallings, "Wireless Communications and Networks", Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition 2009.2. Vijay. K. Garg, "Wireless Communication and Networking", Morgan Kauffmann Publishers, 2007.3. Dharma Prakash Agarwal and Qing-An Zeng, "Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems", Thomson India, 3rd Edition, 2011.4. Mischa Schwartz, "Mobile Wireless Communications", Cambridge University Press, 2005.

L T P C3 0 0 3

102

15ECE26 - FOUNDATION SKILLS FOR INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Analyze trends and decide on the scope of a new product, Understand the product development methodologies and

management, Develop product management plan for a new product based on the type of the new product anddevelopment methodology

CO2 : Understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at requirements for new productdevelopment and convert them in to design specification. And system modeling for system, sub-system and theirinterfaces and arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics

CO3 : Conceptualize new product integrating the Hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems, performdetailed product design, develop prototype plan and coordinate the respective activities with prototype manufacturingfacility, develop test specifications and coordinate the respective activities with testing group, validate the productand confirm its performance as per design specification

CO4 : Perform sustenance engineering and EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customerCO5 : Understand business dynamics, IPR and fit of product into industry.

FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENTGLOBAL TRENDS ANALYSIS AND PRODUCT DECISION : Types of various trends affecting product decision - Social Trends(Demographic, Behavioral, Psychographic), Technical Trends (Technology, Applications, Tools, Methods ), EconomicalTrends(Market, Economy, GDP, Income Levels, Spending Pattern, target cost, TCO), Environmental Trends(EnvironmentalRegulations and Compliance), Political/Policy Trends(Regulations, Political Scenario, IP Trends and Company Policies) - PESTLEAnalysis.

INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGIES AND MANAGEMENT : Overview of Products and Services(Consumer product, Industrial product, Specialty products etc.,) Types of Product Development (NPD/ Re-Engineering(Enhancements, Cost Improvements)/ Reverse Engineering/ Design Porting & Homologation) Overview of Product Developmentmethodologies (Over the Wall/ Waterfall/ V-Model/ Stage-Gate Process/ Spiral/Systems Engineering/ Agile) - Product Life Cycle(S-Curve, Reverse Bathtub Curve) - Product Development Planning and Management (Budgeting, Risk, Resources and DesignCollaboration, Scheduling, Change Management, Product Cost Management) (10)

REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGNREQUIREMENT ENGINEERING : Types of Requirements (Functional, Performance, Physical, Regulatory, Economical,Behavioral, Technical, Stakeholder, Environmental, Industry specific, Internal-Company Specific) - Requirement Engineering(Gathering (VOC), Analysis (QFD), Design Specification) - Traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management.System Design & Modeling: Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design- Interface Design. (9)

DESIGN AND TESTINGConceptualization: Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept generation Techniques - ConceptScreening & Evaluation, Concept Design , S/W Architecture, Hardware Schematics and simulation.Detailed Design: Component Design and Verification - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Programs, S/W Testing -Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing.Prototyping: Types of Prototypes (Mockups, Engineering Assessment Prototype, Alpha, Beta, Gama) - Introduction to RapidPrototyping and Rapid Manufacturing.

L T P C3 0 0 3

103

System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation: Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integrationof Mechanical, Embedded and S/W systems - Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Industry specific(DFMEA, FEA, CFD)Introduction to Product validation processes and stages - Industry specific (Sub-system Testing/IntegrationTesting/ Functional Testing/ Performance Testing / Compliance Testing) - Product Testing standards and Certification- Industry specific - Product Documentation (Compliance Documentation, Catalogue, Brochures, user manual, maintenanceManual,Spares Parts List, Warranty, Disposal Guide, IETMS, Web Tools) (10)

SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORTSustenance: Maintenance and Repair - Enhancements.Product EoL: Obsolescence Management - Configuration Management - EoL Disposal. (8)

BUSINESS DYNAMICS - ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRYThe Industry: Engineering Services Industry - overview - Product development in Industry versus Academia.The IPD Essentials: Introduction to vertical specific product development processes - Product development Trade-offs - IntellectualProperty Rights and Confidentiality - Security and configuration management. (8)

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCES1. Foundation Skills in Integrated Product Development (FSIPD) - Student Handbook, 1st Edition, Published by IT -ITesS

Sector Skills Council, NASSCOM, 2013.2. Ulrich, Karl T. and Eppinger, Steven D "Product Design and Development", 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2012.3. Kevin N. Otto, "Product Design Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development", PEARSON, New

Delhi, 2011

104

15ECE27 - REAL TIME MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Illustrate the concepts of Real time systems and choose scheduling algorithms to develop Real time systemsCO2 : Interpret the programming languages and tools to develop application software for Real time systemsCO3 : Determine the concepts of database techniques in Real time systemsCO4 : Examine the fault tolerance techniques for Real time applicationsCO5 : Exemplify the evaluation techniques for fault tolerance in Real time systems

REAL TIME SYSTEMIssues in Real Time Computing - Structure of a Real Time System - Task classes - Performance Measures for Real TimeSystems - Estimating Program Run Times - Task Assignment and Scheduling - Classical uniprocessor scheduling algorithms -Uniprocessor scheduling of IRIS tasks - Task assignment - Mode changes and Fault Tolerant Scheduling. (9)

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND TOOLS Programming languages and tools - Desired language characteristics - Data typing - Control structures - Facilitating HierarchicalDecomposition - Packages - Run time error handling - Overloading and Generics - Multitasking - Low level programming - TaskScheduling - Timing Specifications - Programming Environments - Run - time support. (9)

REAL TIME DATABASESReal time Databases - Basic Definition - Real time Vs General Purpose Databases - Main Memory Databases - Transactionpriorities- Transaction Aborts - Concurrency control issues - Disk Scheduling Algorithms - Two - phase Approach to improvePredictability - Maintaining Serialization Consistency - Databases for Hard Real Time Systems. (9)

COMMUNICATIONReal - Time Communication - Communications media - Network Topologies Protocols - Fault Tolerant Routing - Fault ToleranceTechniques - Fault Types - Fault Detection - Fault Error containment Redundancy - Data Diversity - Reversal Checks - IntegratedFailure handling. (9)

EVALUATION TECHNIQUESReliability Evaluation Techniques - Obtaining parameter values, Reliability models for Hardware Redundancy - Software errormodels. Clock Synchronization - Clock, A Nonfault - Tolerant Synchronization Algorithm - Impact of faults - Fault TolerantSynchronization in Hardware - Fault Tolerant Synchronization in software. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, "Real - Time Systems", Tata McGraw Hill International Editions, 1st Edition, 2010.2. Rajib Mall, "Real-time systems: theory and practice", Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2008.

REFERENCES1. Peter D.Lawrence, "Real Time Micro Computer System Design - An Introduction", McGraw Hill, 1st Edition 1988.2. Stuart Bennett, "Real Time Computer Control - An Introduction", Prentice Hall of India, 1st Edition, 1998.3. S.T. Allworth and R.N.Zobel, "Introduction to real time software design", Macmillan, 2nd Edition,1987.4. R.J.A Buhur, D.L Bailey, "An Introduction to Real - Time Systems", Prentice - Hall International, 1st Edition 1999.5. Philip.A.Laplante, "Real Time System Design and Analysis", Prentice Hall of India, 4th Edition, April 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

105

15ECE28 - RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Define radar parameters and effects of various factors on radarCO2 : a. Compare MTI, Pulsed Dopper and CW radar systems and

b. describethe principles of operation of delay line cancellers , filters and signal processing techniques andcomprehend the effect of these on radar systems' performance.

CO3 : Explain the principles and operation of Sequential lobbing , Conical Scanning and Mono-pulse tracking radarsCO4 : Outline the principles and operation of radio navigation systems and landing systemsCO5 : Explain and summarise the principles and operation of Satellite based navigation systems

RANGE EQUATIONBasic Radar - Radar Range equation - Radar parameters - Block diagram - Radar frequencies - Derivation of simple rangeequation - Effect of various factors : radar cross section, transmitted Power - Pulse repetition frequency - System losses - S/Nratio and propagation losses. (9)

MTI, PULSE DOPPLER and CW RADAR SYSTEMSDoppler effect - Pulsed radar - CW radar - MTI and Pulsed Doppler radar - Block diagrams and principles of working - Delay linecancellers and filters - Staggered prfs - Doppler filter banks -Digital MTI processing - Range gates and filters used in MTI -Comparison of radar systems. (9)

TRACKING RADARSBasic principles of tracking in angle - sequential lobe switching - conical scanning - Monopulse tracking methods: Amplitudecomparison and Phase comparison - Limitations to tracking accuracy - methods to reduce errors and inaccuracy -Low angletracking - Tracking in range - Tracking in Doppler - Comparison of tracking radars. (9)

RADIO NAVIGATION AND LANDING AIDSGeneral principles - Radio compass Non Directional Beacon (NDB) - Automatic Direction Finding (ADF), VHF OmnidirectionalRadio (VOR), Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) - Hyperbolic Navigation DECCA, OMEGA, LORAN - Mechanics of Landing:Instrument Landing System - Microwave Landing System. (9)

SATELLITE NAVIGATION AND HYBRID NAVIGATION SYSTEMBasics of Satellite Navigation - Global Positioning System (GPS) - Basic principles - Position, velocity determination - Signalstructure - Differential-GPS (DGPS) - Integration of GPS & Inertial Navigation System - Satellite Based Augmentation system -Ground Based Augmentation System - Indian GAGAN navigation system. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. M.I.Skolnik ,"Introduction to Radar Systems", Tata McGraw Hill , 3rd Edition, 2003.2. Myron Kyton and W.R.Fried "Avionics Navigation Systems" John Wiley & Sons 1997.

REFERENCES1. Nagaraja " Elements of Electronic Navigation", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 1996.2. Nathansan, "Radar design principles-Signal processing and environment", Scitech Publishing, 2nd Edition, 1999.3. Hofmann-Wellenhof, Hlichlinegger and J.Collins, "GPS Theory and Practice", 5th Revised Edition, Springer Verlag , 20124. www.gsa.europa.eu

L T P C3 0 0 3

106

15ECE29 - CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Determine the concepts of single stage amplifiers and design with various loadsCO2 : Analyze the differential amplifiers in qualitative and quantative modes of operation and operation of current mirrorsCO3 : Understand the frequency response of single stage amplifiers followed by loading effectCO4 : Explain single stage and two stage operational amplifiers and its compensation techniquesCO5 : Discuss about the switched capacitor filters and the applications of analog circuits

SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIERSImportance of Analog Integrated CMOS Circuits- MOSFET as a switch-Second Order Effects-MOS Device Models- Basic Conceptsof SSA-Common source stage with different loads-Source Followers-Common gate stage-Cascode Stage-Choice of DeviceModels (9)

DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIERS AND CURRENT MIRRORSSingle Ended and Differential operation- Qualitative and Quantitive analysis of Differential pair-Common mode response-DifferentialPair with MOS loads- Gilbert Cell.Basic current mirrors-Cascode current mirrors- Active current mirrors- Large signal and small signal analysis -Common modeoperation. (9)

FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERSGeneral Considerations- Miller Effect-Association of poles with nodes- Frequency response of Common source stage withdifferent loads-Source Followers-Common gate stage-Cascode Stage-Differential Pair.Noise in single stage amplifiers- Effect ofloading in feedback networks (9)

OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERSGeneral Considerations- Performance parameters-One stage and two stage opamps- Gain boosting- Comaprison-Commonmode feedback-Input range limitations-Slew rate-Power supply rejection- Noise in Opamps. Stability nad frequency compensation

(9)

SWITCHED CAPACITOR FILTERSSampling switches- Switched capacitor amplifiers- Switched capacitor integrator- Switched capacitor common mode feedback.NonLinearity and Mismatch concepts.Applications of Analog Circuit design- Oscillators and Phase locked Loop (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOK1. Behzad.Razavi "Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits" Mc-Graw Series-2001, IEEE Press. 2nd Edition.

REFERENCES1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holmberg "CMOS Analog Circuit Design" Second Edition, Oxford University Press, 2004.2. Jan M. Rabaey, AnanthaChandrakasan, BorivojeNikolic, "Digital Integrated Circuits A Design Perspective", Prentice Hall of

India, 2nd Edition, 2012..3. Neil H.E Weste and Kamran Eshraghian, "Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System Perspective", Addison Wesley, New

Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2009.4. A.Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, "BASIC VLSI Design", 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.

L T P C3 0 0 3

107

15ECE30 - INTERNET OF THINGS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Examine the characteristics and challenges for smart object to assess the different IoT technologies that suits the

application.CO2 : Interpret the architecture and paradigms for the Internet of Things to develop an applications.CO3 : Infer the programming concepts of PYTHON to develop IoT systems.CO4 : Design simple IoT systems comprising sensors, edge devices, wireless network connections, data analytics capabilities

and cloud storage.CO5 : Develop IoT based systems for Home , Industry Automation and agriculture productivity Applications.

INTERNET OF THINGSDefinition and Characteristics of IoT - Physical Design of IoT - Logical design of IoT - IoT enabaled Technologies: WirelessSensor Networks, Cloud Computing, Big data analytics, Communication protocols and Embedded Systems - IoT Levels &Deployment Templates - Domain Specific IoTs : Home, City, Environment, Energy, Retail, Logistics, Agriculture, Industry, healthand Lifestyle. (6)

IOT ARCHITECTUREIoT and M2M : Software defined networking, Network function virtualization- IoT System Management with NETCONF-YANG,SNMP, NETOPEER. (9)

PYTHON PROGRAMMINGLanguage features of Python - Data types - Data structures - Control of flow - Functions - File handling - Data/time operation -Classes - Exception handling - Python packages: JSON, XML, HTTPLib, URLLib, SMTPLib. (10)

IOT PHYSICAL DEVICES AND SERVERSBuilding blocks of an IoT device - Programming Inputs and outputs, Serial, SPI and I2C - Sensors and sensor Node and interfacingusing any Embedded target boards : Raspberry Pi / Intel Galileo/ARM Cortex/ Arduino)* Cloud Support : Cloud Storage modelsand communication APIs Webserver - Web server for IoT - Cloud for IoT - Designing a RESTful web API - Amazon Web servicesfor IoT - Data Analytics for IoT : Apache Hadoop - Using map reduce for batch data analytics. (10)

CASE STUDY AND IOT APPLICATION DEVELOPMENTHome & Industry Automation - Cities - Environment - Agriculture - Productivity Applications IoT applications in home - infrastructures- security - Industries - IoT electronic equipments - Big Data and Visualization - Industry 4.0 concepts.* (10)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay Madisetti, "Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach", Universities Press, 2014.2. Matt Richardson & Shawn Wallace, Getting Started with Raspberry Pi, O'Reilly Media Press, Ist Edition, 2012REFERENCES1. Luigi Atzori, Antonio Lera, Giacomo Morabito, "The Internet of Things: A Survey", Journal on Networks, Elsevier Publications,

October, 2010.2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, "Architecting the Internet of Things", Springer 20113. Honbo Zhou, "The Internet of Things in the Cloud:A Middleware Perspective" CRC Press-2012.4. Agus Kuniawa, "Getting started with Intel IoT and Intel Galileo", Kindle Edition,2015.5. http://www.theinternetofthings.eu/what-is-the-internet-of-things

L T P C3 0 0 3

108

15ECE31 - CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the issues, scope and significance of various security mechanisms and services applicable to Communication

networks.CO2 : explain and analyze, algorithms and techniques of Block and Stream ciphers and solve problems in simple substitution

ciphers namely Playfair, Vigenere and Ceaser ciphers.CO3 : Illustrate and analyze mechanisms, algorithms and techniques of key exchange & distribution, authentication and

integrity checks.CO4 : Describe the concepts and explain the operating principles and applications of security protocols & security

mechanisms used in Routing and Transport layers.CO5 : explain and analyze Security related Issues, threats and solutions for various layers of wireless networks.

BASICS OF SECURITYSecurity Goals - Types and Classification of Attacks - Passive, active - Classification of attacks based on OSI layers, Knowledgeof attacker - Security services and mechanisms- Cryptography - Steganography - Revision on Mathematics for Cryptography -Modular Arithmetic - Fields: Galois Fields . (9)

BLOCK AND STREAM CIPHER ALGORITHMSSubstitutional Ciphers - Transposition Ciphers - Stream and Block Ciphers - Data Encrytion Standard - Advanced EncryptionStandard (AES) - Modes of Block Cipher operation - Asymmetric key algorithms : RSA Cryptosystem. - Stream Ciphers: RC4.

(9)

INTEGRITY, AUTHENTICATION AND KEY MANAGEMENTMessage Integrity - Hash functions and their usage - Whirlpool - Message Authentication Codes - Digital signatures - CMAC -Entity Authentication - Key Distribution: Symmetric and Asymmetric Key Distribution methods - Diffie Hellman Key exchange.

(9)

NETWORK SECURITY , FIREWALLS AND WEB SECURITYFirewalls: Packet Filter Firewalls, Application Level Gateways, Firewall Configurations and Limitations - Tunneling - VirtualPrivate Networks - Mail Security - PGP - IP security Architecture - IP V4 and V6 Security features - AH and ESP protocols -Security Associations - Secure Sockets Layer - Transport layer security - Secure Electronic Transaction. (10)

WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITYSecurity Attacks specific to Wireless systems : Worm hole, Tunneling - Counter Measures - DoS - WEP for Wi-Fi network - GSMsecurity - GPRS Security - 3GPP Security - BlueTooth Security - Secure Ad hoc Network. (8)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOK1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Debdeep Mukhopadhyay., " Cryptography and Network security" McGraw- Hill Education, 2015.

REFERENCES1. William Stallings,"Cryptography and Network security: Principles and practice", 7th Edition, Pearson Education,2016.2. Atul Kahate ," Cryptography and Network security", 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2013.3. Christos Douligeris, Dimitrios N. Serpanos, "Network Security: Current Status and Future Directions", John Wiley, 2007.4. R.K.Nichols, "Wireless Security" Tata Mc Graw Hill Education, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

109

15ECE32 - SATELLITE COMMUNICATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : outline the elements and types of satellite orbits, determine the orbital parametersCO2 : describe the subsystems of uplink & downlink satellite communication systems and earth station systemsCO3 : apply the link design for signal to noise ratio calculations and describe the digital modulation schemes for satellite

linksCO4 : explain different multiplexing techniques for satellite systems and digital satellite linksCO5 : describe the use of satellite systems for various applications

SATELLITE ORBITS AND TRAJECTORIESOrbital Mechanics: Orbit Equations, Kepler's Laws, Orbital Period, Orbit types - Look angle determination - Orbital effects oncommunication system performance - Satellite Launch. (8)

SATELLITE AND EARTH STATION SUBSYSTEMSSatellite Subsystems: Power, Transponders, Antennas - AOCS, TTC&M - Control - Effects of earth - Perturbation, sun transit,moon transit - Satellite power design, Reliability - MTBF Basic Equations - System Noise and G/T ratio - Earth Station subsystemsUplink, Downlink and Design for a specified C/N ratio with GEO and LEO examples - Atmospheric and Rain effects on linkperformance. (10)

LINK DESIGN, MODULATION AND ERROR CONTROLSingle link design - Double link design aspects - PAM, Baseband processing - Digital Modulation for satellite links: BPSK, QPSKand QAM - TDM standards for satellite systems - Error control for satellite link: Requirements, ARQ, Concatenated Codes,Interleaving, Turbo codes. (10)

MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONSFDM - FM-FDMA - TDMA - Structure and system design, Onboard Processing systems - DAMA and PAMA - CDMA systemdesign and capacity. (9)

APPLICATIONSRemote sensing - Navigation - Scientific and military application - VSAT: Network architecture, Access Control protocols andtechniques, VSAT Earth stations - Satellite Mobile Telephony - Global star - DBS/DTH Television - GPS - Weather satellites -Maritime satellites. (8)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. T.Pratt, C. Bostian and J.Allnutt, "Satellite Communications", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2014.2. Dennis Roddy, "Satellite Communications", Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition, 2006.REFERENCES1. W.L.Pritchard, H G Suyderhoud and R A Nelson, "Satellite Communication System Engineering", 2nd Edition, Prentice

Hall, 1993.2. Tri. T. Ha, "Digital Satellite Communications", McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 1990.3. Manojit Mithra ,"Satellite Communication", Prentice Hall,2005.4. B.N.Agarwal, "Design of Geosynchronous Space craft", Prentice Hall, 1986.5. M. Richharia, "Satellite systems for Personal Applications", John Wiley, 2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

110

15ECE33 - BIOSIGNAL PROCESSING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Explain the basic signal processing techniques in analyzing biological signals.CO2 : Analyze signals in time series domain and to estimate the spectrum.CO3 : Explain the filtering and detection techniques.CO4 : Develop thorough understanding on basics of ECG pattern recognition and classification algorithm.CO5 : Explain the time frequency representation and multivariate analysis of biosignals.

SIGNAL- SYSTEM AND SPECTRUMCharacteristics of some dynamic biomedical signals- Noises- random- structured and physiological noises. Filters- IIR and FIRfilters - Spectrum - power spectral density function- cross-spectral density and coherence function- cepstrum and homomorphicfiltering - Estimation of mean of finite time signals. (9)

TIME SERIES ANALYSIS AND SPECTRAL ESTIMATIONTime series analysis - linear prediction models- process order estimation- lattice representation- non stationary process- fixedsegmentation- adaptive segmentation- application in EEG- PCG signals- Time varying analysis of Heart-rate variability- modelbased ECG simulator - Spectral estimation - Blackman Tukey method- periodogram- and model based estimation. Application inHeart rate variability- PCG signals. (9)

ADAPTIVE FILTERING AND WAVELET DETECTIONFiltering - LMS adaptive filter- adaptive noise canceling in ECG- improved adaptive filtering in FECG- Wavelet detection in ECG- structural features- matched filtering- adaptive wavelet detection- detection of overlapping wavelets. (9)

BIOSIGNAL CLASSIFICATION AND RECOGNITIONSignal classification and recognition - Statistical signal classification- linear discriminant function- direct feature selection andordering- Back propagation neural network based classification - Application in Normal versus Ectopic ECG beats. (9)

TIME FREQUENCY AND MULTIVARIATE ANALYSISTimefrequency representation- spectrogram- Wigner distribution- Time-scale representation- scalogram- wavelet analysis - Datareduction techniques- ECG data compression- ECG characterization- Feature extraction- Wavelet packets- Multivariate componentanalysis-PCA- ICA. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Arnon Cohen, "Bio-Medical Signal Processing Vol I and Vol II", CRC Press Inc., Boca Rato, Florida 1999.2. Willis J. Tompkins, "Biomedical Digital Signal Processing", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCES1. RaghuveerM. Rao and AjithS.Bopardikar, "Wavelets transform - Introduction to theory and its applications", Pearson

Education, India 2000.2. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, "Biomedical Signal Analysis-A case study approach", Wiley-Interscience/IEEE Press, 20023. Willis J. Tompkins, "Biomedical Digital Signal Processing", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.4. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor, Barrie W.Jervis, "Digital Signal processing- A Practical Approach", Pearson Education Ltd.,2002.

L T P C3 0 0 3

111

15CEE35 - DISASTER MANAGEMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the student will be able toCO1 : Identify natural and manmade disastersCO2 : Explain in detail about causes and effects of natural and manmade disasters.CO3 : Apply geospatial techniques (including GIS) that can enhance vulnerability assessmentsCO4 : Identify and analyse the factors that give rise to differential vulnerabilities and levels of community resilience and

suggest necessary mitigation plansCO5 : Assess and manage these vulnerabilities through disaster planning and policy-making.

NATURAL DISASTERSCyclones, Floods, Drought and Desertification - Earthquake, Tsunami, Landslides and Avalanche. (9)

MAN MADE DISASTERSChemical industrial hazards, major power breakdowns, traffic accidents, Fire, War, Atom bombs, Nuclear disaster- Forest Fire-Oil fire -accident in Mines. (9)

GEOSPATIAL TECHNOLOGYRemote sensing, GIS and GPS applications in real time disaster monitoring, prevention and rehabilitation- disaster mapping.

(9)

RISK ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATIONHazards, Risks and Vulnerabilities - Disasters in India, Assessment of Disaster Vulnerability of a location and vulnerable groups-Preparedness and Mitigation measures for various Disasters- Mitigation through capacity building -Preparation of DisasterManagement Plans. (9)

DISASTER MANAGEMENTLegislative responsibilities of disaster management- Disaster management act 2005- post disaster recovery & rehabilitation,Relief & Logistics Management; disaster related infrastructure development- Post Disaster, Emergency Support Functions andtheir coordination mechanism. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Khanna B K, "All You Wanted To Know About Disasters", New India Publishing Agency, New Delhi, 2005.2. Ramana Murthy, "Disaster Management", Dominant, New Delhi, 2004.3. Rajdeep Dasgupta, "Disaster Management and Rehabilitation", Mittal Publishers, New Delhi, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Disaster Management in India- A Status Report- Published by the National Disaster Management Institute, Ministry of

Home Affairs, Govt. of India, 2004.2. Murthy D. B. N., "Disaster Management: Text and Case Studies", Deep and Deep Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.3. Sundar I. and Sezhiyan T., "Disaster Management", Sarup and Sons, New Delhi, 2007.

L T P C3 0 0 3

112

15CEE36 - RENEWABLE ENERGY RESOURCES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of the course, student will be able toCO1 : Explain the current energy scenario and future energy usage in India.CO2 : Explain the concepts of solar energy, wind energy, tidal energy and biomass energy.CO3 : Compare the energy utilization from wind energy, solar energy, biomass energy and tidal energy.CO4 : Discuss the challenges and problems associated with the use of energy sources.

ENERGY PERSPECTIVESConventional and non conventional energies - Energy and sustainable development - Global energy scenario - Energy scenarioin India - Energy consumption pattern in rural and urban regions in India - Energy efficiency and economy - Energy losses andits control - Renewable energy potential mapping - Plant load factor (9)

SOLAR ENERGY PERSPECTIVESConcept of solar energy - Solar energy to light and to thermal conversions - Total energy and necessary infrastructure - Unitsand measurement of solar radiation - Temperature dependent collecting devices and their efficacies - Design aspects - Typicalapplications: heating, cooling, lighting, power generation and cooking. (9)

WIND ENERGY PERSPECTIVESWind potential in India - Wind turbines and their types - Merits and demerits - Wind power and appropriate coefficient - Efficiencyand performance of wind machines -Energy conversion and storage - Synchronous invertors - Various storage aspects: battery,fly wheel, hydrogen and compressed air. (9)

BIOMASS ENERGY PERSPECTIVESBiomass potential in India - Gobar gas and producer gas - Characteristics of biomass - Operation and design of biogas plants- Objectives, principles and operational aspect of biogassifiers - Pyrolysis and incineration - Power generation from municipalsolid waste and industrial Sludges - Application of biodiesel plants - Fuel cells. (9)

TIDAL ENERGY PERSPECTIVESTidal aspects in coastal India - Tidal energy conversion system: mechanical to electrical and thermal to electrical - Tidal forcecalculation and power generation - conceptualization and potential of geothermal energy - Geothermal vents. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOK1. Sukathme, S.P, "Solar Energy", Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co., New Delhi, 1993.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Rai, G.D., "Solar Energy Utilization", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1993.2. Angrist, S.W, "Direct Energy Conversion", Allied Publishers Ltd., Boston, 1971.

L T P C3 0 0 3

113

15CEE38 - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the student will be able toCO1 : Outline the overall perspectives of Environmental Impact Assessment.CO2 : Design the necessary tools pertaining to assessment of various impacts.CO3 : Recognize and synthesis the diversified socio-economic impacts on the society.CO4 : Design and develop the significant protocols for Environment Management Plan.CO5 : Synthesize and discretise the various impacts originating from typical developmental projects.

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESMENT PERSPECTIVESImpact assessment introduction -Historical perspective -Scope and goals of EIA - Legal and Regulatory aspects in India - Typesand limitations of EIA - Scope studies for Environmental Impact Studies (EIS). Preparation for EIS Planning, Public Participationand Review of EIS. (9)

ASSESSMENT AND MONITORINGEnvironmental setting - environmental impact assessment methodology- cost benefit analysis, environmental indices andindicators for describing affected environment, Life cycle assessment. Role of remote sensing and GIS in Environmental ImpactAssessment (9)

SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENTTypes, steps in performing socio-economic impact assessment, analysis of public services and facilities impacts, social impacts,impacts of economic profile of the community. (9)

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANEnvironmental Management Plan - preparation, implementation and review - Mitigation and Rehabilitation Plans - Policy andguidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post project audit - Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental ImpactAssessment. (9)

SECTORAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESMENTEIA related to the following sectors - Infrastructure -construction and housing Mining - Industrial - Thermal Power - River valleyand Hydroelectric projects-Nuclear Power- EIA for coastal projects. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Canter.R.L, "Environmental Impact Assessment", McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.2. Shukla,S.K., Srivastava.P.R., "Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis", Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi,

1992.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Rao, J.G., and Wotten, D.C., "Environmental Impact Analysis, Handbook", McGraw-Hill, 1980.2. Van Nostr, and Reinhold, J.E. Heer, Hagerty,D. J., "Environmental Assessment and Statement", 1977.3. Canter, L.W., "Environmental Impact Assessment", McGraw-Hill, New York, 1996.4. "Environmental Assessment Source book", Vol. I, II &III, The World Bank, Washington, D.C, 1991.

L T P C3 0 0 3

114

15CEE39 - SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of the course, student will be able toCO1 : Outline the salient features of solid waste management and handling.CO2 : Deduce the source reduction, recycling and reuse techniques of solid waste.CO3 : Analyze the collection systems and method of transfer of solid waste.CO4 : Describe the processing techniques for solid and hazardous waste.CO5 : Select the suitable methods for disposal of solid and hazardous waste.CO6 : Interpret the legislation for management, handling and disposal of solid and hazardous waste.

CHARACTERISTICS AND SOURCE REDUCTION OF SOLID WASTEDefinition, sources, and types of solid waste - Composition, physical, chemical and biological properties of solid wastes - Percapita generation rates - Sampling and characterization of solid waste - Source reduction of wastes -Waste exchange - Recyclingand reuses - Salient features of Indian legislations on management and handling of municipal solid wastes. (9)

COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT OF SOLID WASTEEstimation of solid waste and factors affecting generation rates - On-site handling, storage, and processing- Collection services:municipal and commercial - Industrial services - Collection systems: Hauled-container system (HCS) and stationary containersystem (SCS) - Vehicle and labour assessment - Assessment of collection route - Transfer and transport - Transfer stationlocation- Means and methods of transfer. (9)

PROCESSING AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTEObjective of processing - material separation and processing technologies- biological, chemical and thermal conversiontechnologies- disposal in Landfills: site selection methods and operations, leachate and gas generations and movement andcontrol of gas and leachate techniques - Composting: aerobic and anaerobic - Resource and energy recovery schemes. (9)

HAZARDOUS WASTE CHARACTERIZATION AND MANAGEMENTDefinitions and Identifications of hazardous waste - Origin and characterization of hazardous solid waste- Typical hazardouswastes in MSW - Hazardous waste management: minimization, collection, storage, handling, transport, and disposal - design ofhazardous waste landfills - TCLP tests - National and International legislation for hazardous waste management - AtomicEnergy Regulatory Board -International Atomic Energy Agency - Department of Atomic Energy - Nuclear Power Corporation -Nuclear power plants in India. (9)

NUCLEAR WASTE AND e-WASTESources - classification - effects of nuclear waste- initial treatment of nuclear waste - vitrification, ion exchange, synroc - longterm management - above ground disposal, geological disposal, ocean dumping, transmutation, space disposal - reuse ofwaste - nuclear safety and waste regulation - case study on nuclear disaster - source of e-waste - material composition ofe-waste - recycling and recovery - integrated approaches to e-waste recycling - socio economic factors - treatment option -disposal option - e-waste legislation. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Tchobanoglous, G. et al., "Integrated Solid Waste Management", McGraw-Hill Publication., New York, 1993.2. Ronald E. Hester, Roy M. Harrison "Electronic Waste Management", Royal Society of Chemistry, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Peavy, SH, Rowe, RD and Tchobanoglous, G, "Environmental Engineering", McGraw-Hill Inter Edition, 1985.2. Charles, A.W., "Hazardous Waste Management", McGraw-Hill Publication, 2002

L T P C3 0 0 3

115

15CEE40 - PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the student will be able toCO1 : Outline the concepts, components and factors affecting Sustainable development.CO2 : Discuss the significance of International summits, conventions and agreements on Sustainable development.CO3 : Describe the necessity and importance of Indian and International legal aspects in Sustainability.CO4 : Illustrate the socio economic policies and public participation in Sustainable development.CO5 : Discuss the role and commitment of developed countries in Sustainable development.CO6 : Describe the concepts of Life cycle Assessment and Environmental Standards.

CONCEPTS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENTSustainable development- Evolution of Environmental awareness and Sustainable development, global Sustainable developmentgoals -components and factors affecting Sustainable development-Demographic dynamics and sustainability- Environmentalissues and crisis- ozone layer depletion, global warming and climate change -International Environmental summits, conventionsand agreements- Action plan for Sustainable development- Transboundary issues - Role of developed and developing countriesin sustainable development. (9)

ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTSBiodiversity- Types of biodiversity-Threats to biodiversity- Ecological indicators- Ecological foot print- Carbon foot print-Conservation biology- Strategic species concepts- Ecological economics- Environmental impact of agriculture, animal husbandry,fishery and land use- Habitat fragmentation- Desertification- Natural disasters, geological, hydrological, meteorological andhealth- Nuclear issues. (9)

ECONOMIC ASPECTSProduction, Consumption, Investment and Exchange of Goods and Services - Macroeconomic Aggregates, Circular Flow ofIncome and its Criticism- Methods of Calculating National Income- GNP and GDP- The Goods Market: determination of equilibriumoutput -Financial Markets: demand for money and interest rates- Goods and Financial markets: IS-LM Model- General Overviewof Fiscal and Monetary Policies-relative effectiveness- International Transactions and exchange rates- Market failure & Incompletemarkets Externalities -UN Sustainable development policies through trade- World Trade Organization- International monetaryfund and World bank. (9)

SOCIAL ASPECTSIndigenous Knowledge and Natural Resource Management (NRM) - Commodification, marginalization and degradation -Indigenous knowledge and its relevance to sustainable development - Biopiracy and Biopolitics over Traditional Ecologicalknowledge (TEK)- Environmental Degradation in developing countries - Overview of development- Globalisation and the structuraladjustments- Governance and welfare state- Development processes and social justice -Social inequality as a global challenge-marginalized/vulnerable groups, indigenous people, resettlement & rehabilitation and development. (9)

STRATEGIES FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENTEconomic growth, carrying capacity- Resource depletion and resource protection-Sustainable Management of Forest, Land,water, fishery, agriculture, energy and ecosystem- Natural Disaster management- Cleaner Production, definition, aim, application-Generic process of Cleaner Production Assessment- Life cycle Assessment- definition, necessity and elements- ISOEnvironmental standards- Environmental Audit. (9)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

116

TEXT BOOKS1. Brian Snowdon and Howard R. Vane, "Modern Macroeconomics", Edward Elgar, USA, 20052. Gupta N.K., "Macroeconomics", National Council of Educational Research and Training, New Delhi, 20123. Arun Kumar, "Macroeconomic Aspects of Goods and Services Tax", Economic and Political Weekly, 20154. Ramakrishnan, P. S., "Ecology and Sustainable Development", National Book Trust, New Delhi, 20015. Paul Robbins, John Hintz, and Sarah A. Moore, "Environment and Society: A Critical Introduction", Wiley-Blackwell, 2014

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Nick Hanley, Jason F. Shogren and Ben White, "Environmental Economics in Theory and Practice", Macmillan Publishers,

UK, 19972. Tietenberg T. and Lynne Lewis, "Environmental and Natural Resource Economics", Harper Collins, Routledge, 20163. Kolstad Charles D., "Environmental Economics", Oxford University Press, 2003

117

15CEE41 - SAFETY ENGINEERING IN BUILDINGS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of the course, student will be able toCO1 : Demonstrate the safety concepts, policy and techniques.CO2 : Demonstrate the issues related to physical and chemical hazards and control methods to reduce hazards.CO3 : Outline the fire engineering and explosion control.CO4 : Identify the method of safety provision in execution of civil works.CO5 : Identify the safety consideration in erection and closing operations and material handling in civil construction works.

CONCEPTS OF SAFETY ENGINEERINGConcept of safety - Evolution of modern safety concept- Safety policy - Safety Organization - line and staff - functions for safety-Safety Committee- budgeting for safety. Techniques- Incident Recall Technique (IRT), disaster control, Job Safety Analysis(JSA), safety survey, safety inspection, safety sampling, Safety Audit. (9)

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENEPhysical hazards - Noise, noise exposure regulation, occupational damage, risk factors, and permissible exposure limit. Ionizingradiation, types, effects, monitoring instruments, control programs, control measures. Chemical hazards - Recognition of chemicalhazards-dust, fumes, mist, vapour, fog, gases, types, concentration, Exposure vs. dose, Methods of Control. Concept andspectrum of health - functional units and activities of occupational health services, pre-employment and post-employmentmedical examinations - occupational related diseases, levels of prevention of diseases. (9)

FIRE ENGINEERING AND EXPLOSION CONTROLFire chemistry - Dynamics of fire behavior - Fire properties of solid, liquid and gas - Fire spread - Toxicity of products ofcombustion. Building evaluation for fire safety - Fire load -Fire resistance materials and fire testing -Structural Fire protection -Exits and egress. Statutory Rules and Techniques of fire fighting - Indian Explosive acts and rules -Techniques of fire fightingand demonstration. (9)

SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTIONGeneral safety consideration - analyzing construction jobs for safety - Contract document -Safety certificate for statutory authoritiesfor old building and construction. Safety in Erection and closing operation - Construction materials -Specifications - suitability -Limitations. Safety in typical civil structures - Dams-bridges-water Tanks-Retaining walls-Critical factors for failure-RegularInspection and monitoring. (9)

SAFETY IN MATERIAL HANDLINGGeneral safety consideration in material handling - Ropes, Chains, Sling, Hoops, Clamps, Arresting gears. Selection, operationand maintenance of Industrial Trucks - Mobile Cranes - Tower crane -Checklist - Competent persons. (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Krishnan N.V., "Safety Management in Industry", Jaico Publishing House, Bombay, 1997.2. "Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations", NSC Chicago, 1982.REFERENCE BOOKS1. "Handbook of Occupational Health and Safety", NSC Chicago, 1982.2. James, D., "Fire Prevention Handbook", Butterworths, London, 1986.3. Gupta R.S., "Handbook of Fire Technology", Orient Longman, Bombay, 1997.4. Fulman, J.B., "Construction Safety, Security, and Loss Prevention", John Wiley and Sons, 1979.5. Alexandrov, M.P., "Material Handling Equipment", Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1981.6. Rudenko N., "Material Handling Equipments", Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1981.

L T P C3 0 0 3

118

15MEOE01 - ROBOTICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Examine the configuration of a robot and suggest a robot for a particular operation (pick and place, welding, vision,

climbing etc..).CO2 : Calculate the position, velocity and acceleration for a robot manipulator and solve the forward and inverse kinematics

for a specific robot.CO3 : Calculate mass and inertia for the links of a robot manipulator and also find its forward and inverse dynamics.CO4 : Choose appropriate vision system for the robot and extract images for the desired output.CO5 : Write a program to determine a path for obstacle avoidance for a specific task using matrix laboratory software.

INTRODUCTIONBrief history of robots, robot definitions, today's practical importance of robot applications, challenges faced by robots in industrialsituations, future scope of robotics. (6)

GENERAL CONSIDERATION OF ROBOTIC MANIPULATORSIntroduction - Brief history of robotics- Robot geometrical configurations - wrist and gripper subassemblies - robot drive systems- robot software. (7)

KINEMATICS OF ROBOT MANIPULATORSHomogeneous representation of objects, robot manipulator joint coordinate system, Euler angles and Euler transformations,Denavit- Hartenburg (D-H) representations, direct kinematics in robotics, inverse kinematic solutions, geometrical approach ininverse Kinematics, Jacobian of transformation in robotic manipulation. (13)

ROBOT WORKSPACE AND MOTION TRAJECTORY DESIGNGeneral Structure of robotic workspaces, robotic workspace performance index, extreme reach of robotic hands, robotic taskdescription, robotic motion, trajectory design, general design considerations on trajectories, 4-3-4 trajectory, 3-5-3 trajectory,simulation of robotic workspaces. (9)

ROBOT SENSING AND ROBOT VISION SYSTEMDesirable features of sensor- range sensors - proximity sensors - tactile sensors-force sensors, torque sensing detectors - TVcameras - illumination techniques - fundamentals of image processing visual data acquisition - image enhancement - imagesegmentation - image extraction and recognition- object and model matching - imageextraction. Typical vision systems, robot programming languages - characteristics of robot- level languages - characteristics oftask level languages, simulation languages. (10)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Fu.K S, Gonzales.R.C., and Lee.C.S.G., "Robotic Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence", McGraw Hill International,

2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Mikell.P.Groover, MitchellWeiss, Tooger.N.Nager, and NicholasG.Odrey, "Industrial Robotics Technology, Programming

and Applications", McGraw Hill International, 2004.2. Richard.D.Klafter, Thomas.A.Chmielewski, and Michaelnegin, "Robotic Engineering - An Integral Approach", Prentice

Hall of India, 2002.

L T P C3 0 0 3

119

15MEOE02 - LOW COST AUTOMATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Design and control simple automation systems using fluidics.CO2 : Carry out design, selection and enhance existing automated system using fluidics.CO3 : Demonstrate the importance of using electro mechanical systems in automation.CO4 : Analysis and design of hydraulic circuits and some safety precautions in such circuits.

INTRODUCTIONFluid Power - Hydraulic and Pneumatic fluids - properties and selection. Advantages and applications of Fluid Power. (2)

HYDRAULIC PUMPS AND MOTORSSymbolic representation of fluid power elements. Hydraulic pumps and motors- principle of working, calculation of discharge,power and efficiency - simple problems. (8)

HYDRAULIC VALVESPressure, flow and direction control valves, Electro hydraulic elements, accumulators, intensifiers, power calculations, size ofaccumulators - fluid seals - types and constructional details. (8)

BASIC HYDRAULIC CIRCUITSUnloading, speed control, regenerative and sequencing circuits. Servo systems, typical hydraulic circuits for machine tools andother industrial applications. Circuit design for given functional requirements. (9)

PNEUMATICSAir preparation units - Filter, Regulator and Lubricator. Valve configuration and controls. Pneumatic actuators, diaphragm actuators,back pressure sensors. Pneumatic circuits design - Cascade method. (7)

HYDRO PNEUMATICS AND ELECTRO PNEUMATICSHydro-pneumatics and electro-pneumatic elements and circuits, KV map method and Ladder diagram (5)

FLUIDICSFluidics - Coanda effect, wall attachment devices, digital and proportional devices. Fluidic amplifiers, typical application offluidics for control in fluid power circuits. (6)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Anthony Esposito, "Fluid Power with Application", Prentice Hall,2008.2. Stewart, "Practical Guide to Fluid Power", Taraporevala Sons & Co., Bombay, 2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Subir Kar, "An Introduction to Fluidics", Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1984.2. Fitch, E.C. Jr., "Fluid Power and Control Systems", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1966.3. Pippenger, J.J. and Hicks, T.G., "Industrial Hydraulics", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1979.4. Andrew Parr, "Hydraulics and Pneumatics", Jaico Publishing House, 2008.

L T P C3 0 0 3

120

15MEOE03 - ADAPTIVE CONTROL AND PROCESS DYNAMICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Explain the different computer process control systems and its application.CO2 : Develop the different digital controllers to suitable processes with or without time delay systems.CO3 : Evaluate the advanced control concepts, system identification and process modeling.

REVIEW OF SYSTEMSBasic equation - Integral and instantaneous balances - Material and Energy balances - General form of dynamic models.Linearization of nonlinear systems in state space form - Response of lead-lag modules- Self-regulating system - transferfunction analysis of higher order systems. (6)

SECOND ORDER SYSTEMSA second order system - Pole-Zero cancellation - Systems in series - Blocks in parallel - linear boundary value problems -Parameter estimation of discrete linear systems. Phase plane analysis - generalization of phase plane behavior - nonlinearsystems - Introduction to nonlinear dynamics - bifurcation behavior of systems (9)

APPLICATIONSStirred tank heaters, Absorption-isothermal, continuous stirred tank chemical reactors, Biochemical reactors - adiabatic continuousstirred tank reactor - ideal binary distillation columns. (6)

LINEAR DYNAMIC SYSTEM IDENTIFICATIONSystem Identification: Introduction, dynamic systems, models, system identification procedure. Simulation and Prediction. Non-parametric time and frequency domain methods. Linear dynamic system Identification: Overview, excitation signals, generalmodel structure, time series models, models with output feedback, models without output feedback. Convergence and consistency.

(9)

ADAPTIVE CONTROLParameter estimation methods, minimizing prediction errors, linear regressions and Least squares method, Instrumental -variable method, prediction error method. Recursive algorithms.Closed-loop Identification. Adaptive Control: Close loop andopen loop adaptive control. Self-tuning controller. Auto tuning for PID controllers: Relay feedback, pattern recognition, andcorrelation technique. (9)

ADAPTIVE ADVANCED CONTROLAdaptive Smith predictor control: Auto-tuning and self-tuning Smith predictor. Adaptive advanced control: Pole placement control,minimum variance control, generalized predictive control. (6)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Bequette B.W., "Process Dynamics - Modeling, Analysis and Simulation", PHIPE, New Delhi, 1998.2. Stephanopoulos G., "Chemical Process Control: An Introduction to Theory and Practice", Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

121

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Shinsky F.G., "Process Control Systems: Application, Design and Adjustment", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Book Co., New

York, 1988.2. Nelles O., "Nonlinear System Identification", Springer Verlag, Berlin, 2011.3. Ljung L., "System Identification: Theory for The User", Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1999.4. Astrom K., "Adaptive Control", Second Edition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2002.

122

15MEOE04 - PROJECT PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOME

At the end of this course, the students will be able to

CO1 : Evaluate and select the most desirable projects.

CO2 : Identify desirable characteristics of effective project managers.

CO3 : Apply appropriate approaches to plan a new project and develop a project schedule.

CO4 : Develop a suitable budget for a new project and Identify important risks.

CO5 : Apply appropriate techniques to assess ongoing project performance.

INTRODUCTION

Project management- an overview, project identification and Screening; Project Appraisal. Introduction to Production Systemsand a Generalized Model of Production. Life cycle of a Production System and Major managerial Decisions. (7)

PROJECT PLANNING

Project Planning- Development of Project Network; Project Representation; Consistency and Redundancy in Project Networks;Project Scheduling- Basic Scheduling with A-O-A Networks; Basic Scheduling with A-O-N Networks; Project Scheduling withProbabilistic Activity Times. (7)

TIME MANAGEMENT

Time/Cost Tradeoffs in Projects -Linear Time - Cost Tradeoffs in Projects: A Heuristic Approach; Resource Considerations inProjects - Resource Profiles and leveling. Limited Resource Allocation. (8)

PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION

Project Monitoring and Control with PERT / Cost. Team Building and Leadership in Projects; Project Completion, Review andFuture directions. (8)

DECISION MAKING IN MANAGEMENT

Financial Evaluation of Production Related Decisions- Performance Measures of a Production System. Financial Evaluation ofCapital Decisions. Decision Trees and evaluation of risk; Designing Products & Services - Introducing New Products andServices, Product Mix Decisions. (8)

MANAGEMENT CONTROLS

Fundamentals of MRP I & MRP-II, Toyota production system - evolution of JIT - Waste elimination techniques - Pull control -kanban, kaizen. Lean manufacturing - agile manufacturing, Value chain analysis, Theory of Constraints (TOC) - bottleneck vsconstrained resource - bottleneck identification and elimination - drum buffer rope systems. (7)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

123

TEXT BOOKS

1. Shtub A., Bard J. F. &Globerson S., "Project management: engineering, technology, and implementation", 2nd EditionPrentice Hall, 2004.

2. Lock D., "Project management", Gower Publishing Ltd., 9th Edition, 2007.

3. Kerzner H., "Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling", John Wiley & Sons,11th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Murthy P.R., "Production and Operations Management", New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers,2nd Edition, 2006.

2. Mayer R.R., "Production management", McGraw-Hill, 1968.

3. Harding H.A., "Production management", Macdonald and Evans Ltd, 1974.

124

15MEOE05 - SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Outline the manufacturing and product life cycle management process involved in a product.CO2 : Formulate the forecasting methods and inventory modellingCO3 : Estimate the right procurement and logistics strategy based on the supply chain and product criterion requirements.CO4 : Design and analyze the right supply chain structure for the product along with distribution networkCO5 : Produce the supply chain network diagram incorporating supply chain strategy and competitive strategies involving

material and information flow lines

INTRODUCTIONSupply Chain, Objectives & Stages, power of SCM - Process views of a supply chain - Strategic planning, Achieving a strategicfit in a supply chain and factors affecting the strategic fit - Value chain, supply chain flow lines - Understanding a product,Product life cycle, Fishers classification of products - Effective and efficient supply chain - case studies on products. (9)

SUPPLY CHAIN PROCESSForecasting in supply chain, forecast error distribution order quantity and reorder point characteristics & components of forecasting- time series methods of forecasting, Demand Management in MPC - MTS - ATO - MTO. Inventory, role of cycle inventory,economies of scale to exploit fixed costs, Economies of scale to exploit quantity discounts, Short term discounting and tradepromotions Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory - Bullwhip effect - Product substitution, Postponement. (9)

PRODUCT PROCUREMENT & TRANSPORTATIONProcurement process, EOQ - Sourcing in a supply chain - deciding factors for in-house or outsourcing -Supplier selection -auctions and negotiations, risk management in sourcing Freight management, Transportation networks, Milk run, Cross Docking,tailored transportation, 3PL - 4 PL, Risk management in transportation. (9)

DESIGNING A SUPPLY CHAINSupply chain drivers - Supply chain performance measures - SCOR Model - Network design in a supply chain, factors influencingdesign, Framework for network design network, models for facility location and capacity allocation - Uncertainty in networkdesign - Discounted cash flow analysis, Decision trees in evaluating network design - Distribution, factors influencing distribution,design options for a distribution network. (9)

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN SUPPLY CHAINLean Supply Chain, agile supply chain, Dynamic supply chain design, Impact of technology on SCM, Key trends in SCM, IT insupply chain coordination and design - MRP, ERP, CRM, ISCM - Performance metrics.Discussion on supply chain adopted byprimary industrial sectors and case studies. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Ayers J., "Hand Book of Supply Chain Management", The St. Lencie Press/ APICS Series on Resource Management,

2000.

L T P C3 0 0 3

125

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Burt N.D., Dobler. W.D. and Starling L.S., “World Class Supply Chain Management, The Key to Supply Chain Management",

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2005.2. Chopra S., Meindl P. and Kalra, D.V., "Supply Chain Management, Strategy, Planning and Operation", Pearson Education,

Inc., 20083. Fredendall D.L. and Hill E., "Basics of Supply Chain Management", The St. Lucie Press / APICS Series on Resource

Management, 2001.4. Monczka R., Trent R. and Handfield R., "Purchasing and Supply Chain Management", 3rd edition, Thompson Learning

Inc., 2007.5. Sople V.V, "Supply Chain Management", Pearson Education, 20126. Vollmann T.E., Berry L.W., Whybark D.C. and Jacobs, R.F., "Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain

Management", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2008.7. Wild T., "Best Practice in Inventory Management", Butterworth - Heinmann, Elsevier Science Ltd.,2002.

ADDITIONAL READING1. European Journal of Innovation Management2. Logistics Information Management an International Journal3. Supply Chain Management an International Journal4. Sethi P.S., Yan H. and Zhang H., "Inventory and Supply Chain Management with Forecast Updates", Springer International

Series, 2006.5. Mohantry P.R. and Deshmukh G.S., "Supply Chain Management, Theories and Practices", Published by Biztantra

Innovations in Management, 2005.6. Kulkarani S and Sharma A., "Supply Chain Management", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2008.

126

15MEOE06 - RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of the course, the students will be able toCO1 : Mathematically formulate a given engineering problem as a linear programming problem, and apply Graphical, Simplex,

Two-Phase or Big-M methods to obtain the optimal solution.CO2 : Construct or modify objective functions and constraints using primal and dual relationship, and apply the Dual Simplex

Method to obtain optimal solutions.CO3 : Justify the determined feasible solution (processing time and transportation cost) as optimal solution using MODI

method and Hungarian method.CO4 : Determine the optimal project duration and cost using CPM and PERT technique, also construct complex project

network and control the complex project.CO5 : Categorize (Inventory, Game Theory, Sequencing and Queuing) and solve various decision making problems using

mathematical modeling.

LINEAR PROGRAMMINGLinear programming formulation, graphical solutions, the essence of simplex method, setting up the simplex method, thesimplex method in tabular form, Theory of simplex method, Big M Method, Two Phase Method. (5)

DUALITY AND SENSITIVITY ANALYSISPrimal - Dual construction, Symmetric and Asymmetric Dual, Weak Duality Theorem, Complimentary Slackness Theorem, MainDuality Theorem, Dual Simplex Method, Sensitivity Analysis. (4)

TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENTFormulation of Transportation Problem, Initial Feasible Solution Methods, Optimality Test, Degeneracy in Transportation Problem;Assignment Problem, Hungarian Method, Traveling Salesman Problem. (5)

NETWORK MODELSDefinition of network models - minimal spanning tree algorithm, shortest route algorithm, maximal flow algorithms, PERT, CPM- LP formulation of minimal spanning, maximum flow and PERT, CPM calculations. (5)

INVENTORY AND MODELSClassical EOQ Models, EOQ Model with Price Breaks, EOQ with Shortage, Probabilistic EOQ Model, Newsboy Problem.

(3)

GAME THEORY AND SEQUENCINGTwo Person Zero Sum Game, Pure and Mixed Strategies, Algebraic Solution Procedure, Graphical Solution, Solving by LinearProgramming; Sequencing Problem, Processing of n Jobs Through Two Machines and m Machines, Graphical Method of TwoJobs m Machines Problem. (4)

QUEUING AND SIMULATIONElements of Queuing Model, Pure Birth Death Model, Single Server and Multi-server Markovian Models with Infinite and FiniteCapacity, Machine Repair Model, Networks of Queues. System concepts - Types of systems and models - system simulationprocedure - Monte- Carlo simulation method (simple problems) - Introduction to simulation languages. (4)

TOTAL : 60

L T P C2 2 0 3

127

TEXT BOOKS1. Mohan, C. and Deep, Kusum: "Optimization Techniques", New Age, 2009.2. Mittal, K. V. and Mohan, C. "Optimization Methods in Operations Research and Systems Analysis", Fourth Edition, New

Age, 2016.3. Taha, H. A, "Operations Research - An Introduction", Pearson, (9th Edition), 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Ravindran, A., Phillips, D. T and Solberg, J. J. "Operations Research: Principles and Practice", John Willey and Sons, 2nd

Edition, 2014.2. Hiller, F. S. and Liebermann, G. J. "Introduction to Operations Research", Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.3. S. S. Rao, "Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice", 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

128

15MEOE07 - SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of the course, the students will be able toCO1 : Infer environmental sustainability and to implement in more suitable ways to the society.CO2 : Identify methods for reducing energy consumption and to implement lower carbon technologies to achieve sustainable

society.CO3 : Collect and organize information about historical perspectives of sustainability and for further development of sustainable

industries.CO4 : Compare the balance between food production and population growth to plan the optimal usage of water resources

and to evaluate the solution for the problems of urban sprawl.CO5 : Explore the fossil fuels formation of oil, natural gas and coal, environmental effects of mining and metals processing

and it's time to depletion.

INTRODUCTIONThe concept of environmental sustainability, Examples of non-sustainability and sustainability. The special role of engineers inhelping society transition to a more sustainable state. Definitions, principles, and indicators of sustainability. Overall criteria fordevelopment that is sustainable. Indicator studies. (12)

THE RISE OF SUSTAINABILITYHistorical perspectives in Europe and in the US. Modern debates: Sustainability extremists, Environmentalists, TraditionalEngineers, and Anti-sustainability extremists. "Tragedy of the commons" and the ethics of sustainability. Models for achievingsustainable industries. (12)

POPULATION GROWTH ON A FINITE EARTHPopulation models, population growth, exponential and logistic growth, variation in population among nations,population policy,Food production,Protecting and Promoting Human Health - Food security and nutrition and sustainable agriculture- Waterresources, Urban sprawl. (9)

NON-RENEWABLE RESOURCESFossil fuels - Formation of fossil fuels: oil, natural gas, coal. Modelling of oil reserves. Mineral resources: Use and exploitation,environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources, case studies-Time-to-depletion. (12)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Tatyana P. Soubbotina, "An Introduction to Sustainable Development", Washington, 2nd Edition, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Jeffrey D. Sachs, "The Age of Sustainable Development", Columbia University Press, 4th Edition, 2015.2. K.A.Rasure, "Globalization And Sustainable Development", Oxford book company, 2nd Edition, 2010.3. Barry Dalal Clayton and Stephen Bass., "Sustainable Development Strategies- a resource book", Earthscan Publications

Ltd, London, 2002.4. Karel Mulder, "Sustainable Development for Engineers"- A Handbook and Resource Guide, Green Leaf Publishing, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

129

15MEOE08 - PROCESSING AND APPLICATIONS OF BIOMATERIALS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of the course, the students will be able toCO1 : Identify the suitable material for human implants and perform mechanical and tribological characterization. (Tensile,

compression, hardness, wear, corrosion and water absorption).CO2 : Choose a bio compact material (calcium phosphate, ceramic, glass, bioinert ceramics, polymeric, HDPE, hybrid,

metals and alloys, Ti Alloys - Co-Cr-Mo, Ni or Ta-Based Alloys - Other Non-Ferrous alloys) for a orthopedic joints.CO3 : Develop successful implants (biological, mechanical, morphological Compatibility) for dental and bone applications.CO4 : Evaluate biomaterials, metals, ceramics, polymers, micro/nano for Surface modification, micro/nano fabrication to find

the tensile strength and micro structure.CO5 : Estimate the percentage of reinforcement (particle, fiber, laminates) to increasing the strength (tensile, flexural, bending,

fatigue, wear, and corrosion) under specified constraints (density) for human implants.CO6 : Design a suitable shape of the implants for orthopedic joint applications.

FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMATERIALS AND BIOCOMPATIBILITYIntroduction - definitions and their Implications - Biomaterial - Biocompatibility -Host response - Cell-Material Interactions -Experimental Evaluation of Biocompatibility - In vitro Tests - In vivo Tests - Steps for characterizations of biomaterials - Broadoverview of Fundamentals. (7)

MATERIALS FOR ORTHOPEDIC APPLICATIONSIntroduction - Structure and Properties of Hard Tissues - Processing and Properties of Bioceramics and Bioceramic Composites- Calcium Phosphate Based Biomaterials - Hydroxyapatite-Ceramic Composites - Glass-Ceramics Based Biomaterials - MicaBased Glass Ceramics - Other Bioglass-Ceramics - Bioinert Ceramics - Polymeric Biomaterials - Polymer-Polymer Composites- Polymer-Ceramic Composites - HDPE-Hap-Al2O3 Hybrid Composites - Metals and Alloys in Biomedical Applications - IssuesLimiting Performance of Metallic Biomaterials - Wear of Implants - Corrosion of Metallic Implants - Ti-Based Alloys - Co-Cr-Mo,Ni or Ta-Based Alloys - Other Non-Ferrous Metals and Their Alloys - Coating on Metals. (12)

TITANIUM DENTAL IMPLANT SYSTEMSIntroduction - Requirements for Successful Implant Systems - Biological Compatibility - Mechanical Compatibility - MorphologicalCompatibility - Osseo integration and Bone/Implant Interface - Integrated Implant System. (7)

PROCESSING OF BIOMATERIALSIntroduction - Processing of Biomaterials - Metals - Ceramics - Polymers - Biocomposites - Sterilization - Processing for Scale- Micro/Nano Surface Modification - Micro/Nano Fabrication-Tensile testing, microscopy (SEM,AFM)evaluation. (7)

BIOMATERIAL APPLICATIONSIntroduction - Applications in Medicine, Biology, and Artificial Organs - Cardiovascular Medical Devices - Extracorporeal ArtificialOrgans - Orthopedic Implants - Dental Implantation - Bioadhesive - Opthalmologic Applications - Cochlear Prosthesis - DrugDelivery - Tissue Engineering - 2-D and 3-D tissue engineering applications and their mechanical characterization -ArrayTechnologies and Specific Medical Applications. (12)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

130

TEXT BOOK1. BikramjitBasu, Ashok Kumar and Katti S., 'Advanced Biomaterials - Fundamentals, Processing and Applications', John

Wiley & Sons, INC, Publication, 2015.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Joon. B. Park and Joseph D. Bronzino 'Bio Materials - Principles and Applications', CRC press, 2010.2. Park J. B. and Lakes R.S., 'Bio Materials - An Introduction', Plenum Press, New York, 20093. Dee KC, Puleo and DA, Bizios R, 'An introduction to tissue-biomaterial interactions', John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

131

15MEOE09 - NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF FLUID FLOW

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of the course, the students will be able toCO1 : Demonstrate ability to use the Finite-Volume Method to analyze one and two-dimensional problems of heat transfer

and irrotational fluid flowCO2 : Apply numerical techniques to solve systems of algebraic equations and integrate ordinary differential equationsCO3 : Evaluate heat transfer rates, fluid flow rates, etc.CO4 : Judge the correctness of the numerical solutions;CO5 : Recognize the need for turbulence models

CONSERVATION LAWS OF FLUID MOTION AND HEAT TRANSFERIntroduction - Governing equations of fluid flow and heat transfer - Navier-Stokes (N-S) equations for a Newtonian fluid (9)

IRROTATIONAL FLOWS AND LAMINAR BOUNDARY LAYERSIntroduction - Potential functions and stream functions - Numerical treatment of steady irrotational flows in two dimensions -Simple two-dimensional laminar flows - Boundary layer over a flat plate - Blasius solution - Numerical treatment of ordinarydifferential equations related to Blasius solution. (9)

NUMERICAL HEAT TRANSFER - FINITE VOLUME METHODIntroduction - Discretization of governing partial differential equations of heat transfer- Applications to steady and unsteady heatconduction in one and two dimensions - Treatment of heat sources - Explicit and implicit solution schemes for steady andunsteady heat conduction. (9)

NUMERICAL TREATMENT OF FLUID FLOW - FINITE VOLUME METHODDiscretization of governing partial differential equations of fluid flow - Differencing schemes for convective-diffusive flows -Treatment of flow boundary conditions - Introduction to the SIMPLE Algorithm. (9)

TURBULENT FLOWSIntroduction - Reynolds Averaged N-S equations for turbulent flows - Eddy viscosity concept - Mixing length models - Briefoverview of turbulence kinetic energy and dissipation (k-e) models - Brief overview of advanced turbulent flow models. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Ghoshdastidar.P.S, "Computer Simulation of Flow and Heat Transfer", Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 1999.2. Versteeg. H.K. and Malalasekara.W, "An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method",

Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, England, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Muralidhar. K., Sundararajan. T., "Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi,

2003.2. Niyogi P., Chakrabarthy. S.K., Laha. M.K., "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics", Pearson Education, 2005.3. Chung T.J., "Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge Univ. Press, New York, 2002.4. Anil W. Date, "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge Press, UK, 2005.5. Titus Petrila and Damian Trif, "Basics of Fluid Mechanics and Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics", Springer,

Boston, 2005.

L T P C3 0 0 3

132

15MEOE10 - SOLAR ENERGY UTILISATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAt the end of the course student will be able toCO1 : Calculate solar time, local time, earth-sun angles, direct and indirect solar radiation for the given location using earth-

sun geometry.CO2 : Categorize solar cell materials with its properties and calculate energy conversion efficiency of solar cells using I-V

characteristic curves.CO3 : Derive the expression for overall heat transfer coefficient using network resistance method, relations for collector

efficiency factor and collector heat removal factor of non- concentrating solar collectors.CO4 : Calculate heating loads using F-chart method for air and liquid based solar heating systems.CO5 : Analyze the Performance of the following thermo-electric devices: generators, refrigerators and heat pumps.

INTRODUCTION TO SOLAR ENERGYIntroduction, overview of applications - calculation of solar constant, terminology related to solar radiation, definition and calculationof solar times, definition and calculation of all solar angles and related earth angles. (4)

PHOTOVOLTAICSFundamentals of solar cells: types of solar cells, semiconducting materials, band gap theory, absorption of photons, excitonsand photoemission of electrons, band engineering; Solar cell properties and design; p-n junction photodiodes, depletion region,electrostatic field across the depletion layer, electron and holes transports, device physics, charge carrier generation,recombination and other losses, I-V characteristics, output power. (9)

SOLAR CELLSolar Cell Applications - Solar cell manufacturing processes: material resources, chemistry, and environmental impacts; lowcost manufacturing processes - Thin film solar cells - Single crystal, polycrystalline and amorphous silicon solar cells, cadmiumtelluride thin-film solar cells, conversion efficiency. (6)

SOLAR CALCULATION AND SOLAR COLLECTORSCalculation of extra-terrestrial irradiation on a horizontal surface on a hourly and daily basis, relationship between radiation ontitled and horizontal surfaces, effect of atmosphere on solar radiation, Hottel's estimation of clear sky radiation, types andclassification of solar collectors, terminology related to non-concentrating collectors, efficiency of a solar collector. (4)

THERMAL MODELLING OF NON- CONCENTRATING COLLECTORSModeling of heat transfer processes in flat plate collector, formula for effective transmittance-absorptance product, estimation oftop, bottom and overall heat loss coefficient using resistance network method, collector stagnation temperature, temperaturedistribution between tubes and along tubes, collector efficiency factor F, collector heat removal factor FR, collector heat exchangermodeling and combined efficiency factor FR. (10)

SOLAR THERMAL CONVERSIONOverview of active and passive heating - Calculation of space and water heating loads, degree-days, F-chart method for air andliquid based system. Low, medium and high temperature collectors, Heat storage, storage media, steam accumulator, otherstorage systems, heat exchangers and applications of stored energy. (6)

THERMO- ELECTRIC SYSTEMSThermoelectricity, Peltier effect, Seebeck effect; thermoelectric materials, Bismuth telluride, automotive thermoelectric generators,radioisotope thermoelectric generator; thermoelectric power generators, thermoelectric refrigerators and heat pumps. (6)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

133

TEXT BOOKS1. Principles of Solar Engineering, D. Yogi Goswami, Taylor and Francis, 2000, ISBN 10: 1-56032- 714-62. Garg H.P., Prakash J., "Solar Energy: Fundamentals & Applications", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Applied Photovoltaics, Stuart Wenham, Martin Green, and Muriel Watt, Earthscan, 2007, ISBN 1-84407-407-32. Photovoltaic Engineering Handbook, F. Lasnier and T. G. Ang, IOP Publishing UK (Adam Hilger USA) 1990, ISBN 0-

85274-311-43. Semiconductor Devices, Physics, and Technology, Second Edition, S. M., Sze, New York, NY: Wiley, 2001. ISBN:

04718742484. Solar Cells: Operating Principles, Technology and system Applications, Martin A. Green, Published by the University of

New South Wales, 1998, ISBN 0 85823 580 35. S. P. Sukhatme, "Solar Energy", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1999.6. J. A. Duffie and W.A.Beekman, " Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2005.7. Tiwari G.N.,Suneja S., "Solar Thermal Engineering System", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1997.8. T.Bhattachariya, "Terrestial solar Photovoltaic", Narosa Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.9. H.S.Rauschenbach, "Solar Cell Array Design Hand Book", Van NostrandReinfold Company, New York, 1980.

134

15EEOE01 - ENERGY AUDITING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Understand the current energy scenario and the need for energy auditing.CO2 : Describe the energy conservation schemes in steam systems.CO3 : Identify the design considerations for minimizing energy consumption in compressors, fans and blowers.CO4 : Understand the concepts of energy efficient electrical systems.CO5 : List the techno commercial statement for the investment for energy saving.

POWER AND ENERGY MANAGEMENTEnergy Scenario - Role of Energy Managers in Industries - Energy Monitoring, Auditing and Targeting - Economics of variousenergy conservation schemes - Total Energy Systems. (9)

ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MECHANICAL PROCESSESEnergy Audit - Various Energy Conservation Measures in Steam - Losses in Boiler - Energy Conservation in Steam Systems -Case studies. (9)

ENERGY CONSERVATION IN PRODUCTIVE PROCESSESEnergy Conservation in Centrifugal pumps, Fans, Blowers and Air compressor - Energy Consumption - Energy saving potentials- Design Consideration. (9)

ENERGY CONSERVATION IN NON - PRODUCTIVE PROCESSESRefrigeration and Air conditioning - Heat load estimation - Energy conservation in cooling towers and Spray ponds - EnergyEfficiency in Lighting - Case studies. (9)

ENERGY CONSERVATION CONTROL STRATEGIES AND IMPLEMENTATIONControl: Thermostats - Boiler controls - Proportional, Integral and Derivative control - Adaptive control - Compensators.Implementation: Investment and Pay back calculations for energy conservation measures - Organizational support for energymanagement motivation. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Eastop T.D and Croft D.R, "Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists", Logman Scientific & Technical publications,

1990.2. Reay D.A, "Industrial Energy Conservation", Pergamon Press, 1st Edition, 1977.3. Larry C Witte et. al, "Industrial Energy Management & Utilization". Springer Publication, 1st Edition, 1990.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, "Power System Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill Co, 2nd Edition, 2008.2. https://www.beeindia.gov.in/content/energy-auditors (Guide Book link)

GUIDE BOOKS2.1. General Aspects of Energy Management & Energy Audit2.2. Energy Efficiency in Thermal Utilities2.3. Energy Performance Assistance for Equipment And Utility Systems2.4. Energy Efficiency in Electrical Utilities

L T P C3 0 0 3

135

15EEOE02 - SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able to,CO1 : Describe the solar radiation, measurements and characteristics of solar PV cell.CO2 : Develop the model of a PV system and its applications.CO3 : Describe the basic types and mechanical characteristics and model of wind turbine.CO4 : Analyse the electrical characteristics and operation of various wind-driven electrical generators.CO5 : Understand various power electronic converters used for hybrid system.

SOLAR RADIATION AND SOLAR CELL FUNDAMENTALSBasic characteristics of sunlight - Solar spectrum - Insolation specifics - Irradiance and Irradiation pyranometer - Solar energystatistics - Solar PV cell - I - V characteristics - P - V characteristics - Fill factor. Modeling of solar cell - Maximum Power PointTracking. (9)

SPV SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND APPLICATIONSPV module - Blocking diode and Bypass diodes - Composite characteristics of PV module - PV array - Solar cell array designconcepts - Peak power operation - System components. PV - powered fan - PV fan with battery backup - PV - powered pumpingsystem - PV powered lighting systems - Grid connected PV systems. (9)

WIND ENERGY FUNDAMENTALS AND COMPONENTSWind source - Wind statistics - Energy in the wind - Basic principle of wind energy conversion - Nature of wind power - Wind -turbine power characteristics - Parts of wind turbines - Braking systems - Tower - Maximum power operation. (9)

WIND TURBINE TYPES AND CONTROLClassification of WECS - Generating Systems - DC generator, Synchronous generator, Induction generator, Doubly fed Inductiongenerator - Direct Driven generator - Generator control - Load control. (9)

SYSETM INTEGRATIONEnergy storage - Power electronic converters for interfacing wind electric generators - Power Quality issues - Hybrid system:Wind Diesel systems - Wind - Solar systems. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. S N Bhadra, S Banerjee and D Kastha, 'Wind Electrical Systems', Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2005.2. Chetan Singh Solanki, 'Solar Photovoltaic's: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications' PHI Learning Publications,

2nd Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Roger A. Messenger and Jerry Ventre, 'Photovoltaic Systems Engineering', Taylor and Francis Group Publications, 2nd

Edition, 2003.2. M.Godoy Simoes and Felix A. Farret, 'Alternative Energy Systems: Design and Analysis with Induction Generators', CRC

press, 2nd Edition, 2008.3. Ion Boldea, 'The Electric Generators Hand Book - Variable Speed Generators', CRC press, 2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

136

15EEOE03 - HYBRID SMART VEHICLES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able to,CO1 : Explain the dynamics of vehicle motion and propulsion systems.CO2 : Identify various energy storage devices used in hybrid vehicles.CO3 : Understand the application of electric machines in electric vehicles.CO4 : Describe the working of hybrid electric drive trainCO5 : Describe the control and energy management strategies in hybrid vehicles.

INTRODUCTIONIntroduction to Hybrid Electric Vehicles - Social and Environmental importance of hybrid and Electric vehicles - Components, -Vehicle mechanics - Roadway fundamentals - vehicle kinetics - Dynamics of vehicle motion - Propulsion system (9)

ENERGY STORAGEEnergy Storage Requirements in Hybrid and Electric Vehicles. Battery, Fuel Cell, Super Capacitor - Flywheel based energystorage and its analysis - Hybridization of different energy storage devices. (9)

DC AND AC ELECTRICAL MACHINESMotor and Engine rating - Requirements, DC machines, Three phase AC machines - Induction machines - Permanent magnetmachines - Switched reluctance machines. Matching the electric machine and Internal Combustion Engine (ICE), - Sizing themotor - Sizing the power electronics - Selecting the energy storage technology - Communications - Supporting subsystems.

(9)

HYBRID ELECTRIC DRIVE-TRAINBasic concept of electric traction, Transmission configuration - Components - Gears - Differential - Clutch - Brakes Regenerativebraking, Motor sizing. Hybrid traction : Various hybrid drive-train topologies, Power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies,Fuel Efficiency Analysis. (9)

ENERGY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIESEnergy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicles, - Component level control and supervisory control-Comparison and its implementation issues of different energy management strategies. (9)Case study: Volvo XC90 T8 Plug-In Hybrid, Nissan X-Trial hybrid

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Iqbal Hussain, "Electric & Hybrid Vehicles - Design Fundamentals", CRC Press, 2nd Edition, New York, 2010,2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yi mi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay and Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles:

Fundamentals, Theory and Design”, CRC Press, 2004.3. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology”, Wiley Publishers, 2003.

L T P C3 0 0 3

137

15EEE07 - ELECTRICAL SAFETY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Expand skills in identifying the presence of electrical hazards, implementing measures to minimize risks.CO2 : Develop skills in investigative techniques for determining the cause of electrical accidents, fires and explosions.CO3 : Analyze and apply various grounding and bonding techniques.CO4 : Select appropriate safety method for low, medium and high voltage equipment.CO5 : Assess and provide solutions to a practical case study.

INTRODUCTION AND HAZARDS OF ELECTRICITYIntroduction - Hazard Analysis: Primary and Secondary hazards- Arc, Blast, Shocks - Causes and Effects - Summary of Causes- Protection and Precaution - Injury and Death protective strategies - IE Rules 1956 - Basic rules for new installations: Powersystem, Domestic and Industry.(Qualitative treatment only) (9)

ELECTRICAL SAFETY EQUIPMENTGeneral inspection and Testing procedure for electrical safety equipment - Electrical safety equipment for external protection:Flash and Thermal protection - Head and Eye protection - Insulation protection. Electrical safety equipment for internal protection:Over voltage, Short circuit, Earth Fault, Leakage current, High/Low frequency - Single Line diagram of industrial power systemwith safety control - Electrician's Safety Kit and Materials. (9)

SAFETY PROCEDURESIntroduction - Six-Step Safety Method - Job briefings - Energized or De-energized - Safe switching of power systems - GeneralEnergy Control Programs - Lockout - Tag out - Voltage measurement techniques- Placement of safety grounds - Flash hazardcalculations and approach distances - Calculating the required level of arc protection (Flash hazard calculations) - Barriers andWarning signs - Tools and Test equipment - Field marking of potential hazards - Shock avoidance techniques- One-minutesafety audit. (9)

GROUNDING AND ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCENeed for Electrical Equipment grounding - System grounding - Equipment grounding - Types of Earthing - Earth Testing forelectrical equipment's in Power house and Industry - Eight Step Maintenance program - Maintenance requirements for specificequipment and location - IEC and UL standard. (9)

VOLTAGE SAFETY SYNOPSIS AND MEDICAL SAFETY MANAGEMENTSafety equipment's and safety procedures for low voltage and high voltage system - Electrical safety around electronic circuits- Electrical safety for medical equipment like Over current safety, Isolation, EMI and Harmonics - Battery Maintenance Procedure- Stationary Battery Safety - Accident Prevention - Accident Investigation - First Aid - Rescue Techniques - Electrical safetyprogram structure and development - Safety Meetings - Safety Audits. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. John Cadick, Mary Capelli-Schellpfeffer and Dennis neitzel and AI Winfield “Electrical Safety Handbook",McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Ltd., 4th Edition, 2012.2. Dennis Neitzel and Al Winfield, "Electrical Safety Handbook", McGraw-Hill Education, 4th Edition, 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

138

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Mohamed A El-Sharkawi, "Electric Safety: Practice and Standards", CRC press, New York, 2013.2. Martha J. Boss and Gayle Nicoll, "Electrical Safety: Systems, Sustainability, and Stewardship", CRC press, New York,

2014.3. Ray A. Jones and Jane G. Jones, "The Electrical Safety Program Guide", National Fire Protection Association, Quincy,

2011.4. James H. Wiggins JR., "Managing Electrical Safety", Abs Consulting, Maryland, 2011.5. Maxwell Adams. J, "Electrical Safety- A Guide to the Causes and Prevention of Electric Hazards", The Institution of

Electric Engineers, 1994.6. Ray A. Jones and Jane G. Jones, "Electrical Safety in the Workplace", Jones & Bartlett Learning, Technology and

Engineering, 2000.7. Video Link: Electrical Safety in the Workplace Seminar DVD - NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

http://www.nfpa.org/training-and-events/archived/training-videos/electrical-safety-videos8. E-Book: Johncadick, Marycapelli-schellpfeffer, Dennis neitzel, "Electrical Safety Handbook", McGraw Hill publishing

company Ltd., 3rd Edition, 1994.https://installist.files.wordpress.com/2009/12/electrical-safety-handbook.pdf

139

15EEE14 - ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTING SYSTEM

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able to,CO1 : Understand the properties of light, importance of lighting in various fields and types of lighting.CO2 : Understand the properties and laws of illumination, working of discharge lamps, fluorescent lamps, tungsten filament

lamps and light control.CO3 : Compare the various lighting techniques & employ lighting control methods.CO4 : Choose the building materials and construction techniques for energy efficient lighting.CO5 : Employ renewable energy methods for energy efficient lighting.

LIGHTINGLighting - Importance of lighting in buildings, Interior designing - Photography, Architecture - Difference between good and badlighting - Challenges in lighting - Types of lighting. (9)

ILLUMINATION FUNDAMENTALS & VARIOUS ILLUMINATION METHODSIntroduction - Terms used in illumination - Laws of illumination - Polar curves - Photometry - Integrating sphere - Sources of light- Discharge lamps, Incandescent lamps - MV and SV lamps. (9)

ENERGY EFFICIENT LIGHTINGSmart lighting - Fluorescent lamps - Comparison between tungsten filament lamps and fluorescent tubes - Basic principles oflight control - Types and Design of lighting and flood lighting.- CFL - LED - High Intensity Discharge lamps (9)

BUILDING MANGEMENT SYSTEMEnergy Efficient landscape design - Natural lighting - Choice of building materials for energy efficient lighting - Light pipes - Lightfixtures - Green buildings - Construction techniques (9)

CASE STUDYSolar lighting techniques - Lighting using wind power - Energy conservation building code - Energy efficient buildings in thecountry. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Philip Gordon, 'Principles and Practices of Lighting Design: The Art of Lighting Composition', Blue Matrix Publications,

2011.2. Jerry Yudelson, 'Green Building Through Integrated Design', The McGrawHill Publisher, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Derek Phillips, "Daylighting: Natural Light in Architecture” Elsevier, 2004.2. Jerry Yudelson, "Greening Existing Buildings", The Mc Graw Hill Companies, 1st Edition, 2009.3. Sam Kubba, "Handbook of Green Building Design and Construction", Elsevier, 2012.4. Solanki.C.S, 'Solar Photovoltaic Technology and Systems', PHI 2013.5. J. F. Manwell, J.G. Mcgowan and A.L. Rogers, “Wind Energy Explained : Theory, Design and Applications”, Wiley

Publications, 2nd Edition, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

140

15ECOE01 - CONSUMER ELECTRONICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the fundamental concepts, construction and working of Audio systemsCO2 : Analyze the recording and reproduction techniques of Audio SystemsCO3 : Differentiate between the types of electronic music synthesizersCO4 : Describe the fundamental concepts, construction and working of Video systemsCO5 : Identify the problem and troubleshoot the consumer electronic products like TV, Washing Machines, Air Conditioners

AUDIO SYSTEMMicrophone - Characteristics of Microphones - Gun Microphones - Wireless Microphones - Headphones and Headsets -Electrostatic Phones - Electret Electrostatic Headphones - Hearing Impairments - Hearing Aids - Ideal Loudspeaker - BasicLoudspeaker - Loudspeaker Construction - Woofers - Mid range, Extended range and High frequency Loudspeakers - Multispeakersystems - Baffles - Horns - Stereo Systems. (10)

RECORDING AND REPRODUCTIONMaking the Record - Stereo Pickup Techniques - Stereo Recording Systems - Disc Equipment: Recording and PlaybackCharacteristics - Stereo Pickup heads - Magnetic recording and Playback - Magnetic Erasing - Optical Recording and Reproduction- Mono, Stereo and Quad - Stereo Multiplexing - Equalisers and Mixers. (9)

ELECTRONIC MUSIC SYNTHESIZERSTypical Generator - Basic Modifiers - Voltage Control - Envelope Generator - Electric Guitar - Electric Wind Instrument -Recording- Digital Computer - Public Address System - Speaker Matching Systems - Theater Sound System: Sound track, Types of soundfilm, Theater Sound Reproduction system, Working of a Projector. (9)

VIDEO SYSTEMS AND DISPLAYSMonochrome - Color TV standards - TFT, Plasma, HDTV, LCD,LED TV, Video Telephone and Video Conferencing (9)

DOMESTIC AND CONSUMER APPLIANCESIn Car Computers - Washing machines - Microwave ovens - Air-conditioners and Refrigerators - Airline Reservations - Remotecontrols Automated Teller Machines - Set top Boxes - Bar Codes - RFID (8)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Bali, Consumer Electronics, Pearson Education,1st Edition, 2005.2. Philip Hoff, Consumer electronics for Engineers, Cambridge University Press,1st Edition, 1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Sridhar Canumalla, Puligandla Viswanadham P.S.Bimbra, Portable Consumer Electronics: Packaging, Materials, and

Reliability, Pennwell Books, 1st Edition, 2010.2. Douglas Kinney, A Beginners Guide to Consumer Electronics Repair: Hand Book and Tutorial, iUniverse, Inc, 1st Edition,

2006.3. Thomas M. Coughlin, Digital Storage in Consumer Electronics: The Essential Guide, Elsevier Inc., 1st Edition, 2008.4. U.S. Consumer Electronics Industry in Review, Electronic Industries Association, Consumer Electronics Group, 1993.5. https://www.pssurvival.com/ps/electronic

L T P C3 0 0 3

141

15ECOE02 - ARM SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Distinguish between the feature of ARM7 and cortex microcontroller and infer the architecture, instruction set and

programming model of ARM Cortex.CO2 : Interpret interrupt service handler & exception types of ARM processor to develop ALP programs.CO3 : Exemplify memory mapping technique in ARM embedded system.CO4 : Illustrate the programming concepts in real time embedded application.CO5 : Examine debugging technique to develop application software for real time system.

EMBEDDED HARDWAREARM Embedded system-CISC and RISC philosophy-Embedded system Hardwar-ARM and Cortex architecture- Programmingmodel- Date flow- Operating modes - Instruction sets. (9)

INTERRUPT AND EXCEPTIONSInterrupts in ARM and cortex- Exception Types- Fault Exceptions- The NVIC and Interrupt Control - Interrupt Behavior. (9)

MEMORY SYSTEMSMemory System Features Overview- Memory Maps- Memory Access Attributes- Default Memory Access Permissions- Bit-Band Operations- Unaligned Transfers- Exclusive Accesses and Endian Mode (9)

PROGRAMMINGExceptions Programming- Advanced Programming Features and System Behavior- Efficient C Programming- FIR and IIR filterimplementation-Introduction to RTOS (9)

SYSTEM DEBUGGINGDebugging Features- CoreSight- Debug Modes- Debugging Events- Breakpoint- Accessing Register - Debugging Components-Case study: Embedded system (using ARM/cortex) for monitoring- controlling and industrial automation. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Andrew N. Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright, "ARM System Developer's Guide Designing and Optimizing System

Software", Elsevier Inc 2010.2. Joseph Yiu, "The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M", Elsevier- Newness, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Peter Barry Patrick Crowley "Modern Embedded Computing Designing Connected, Pervasive, Media- Rich Systems",

Elsevier, 2012.2. Steve Furber, “ARM system on Chip Architecture”, Addision Wesley Professional, 2nd Edition, 2000.3. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded systems : Introduction to ARM @ cortex TM - Micro controllers”, 5th Edition, 2015.4. Rajkamal, “Embedded system Architecture Programming and Design”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2009.5. Shibu K.V. “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1st Edition, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

142

15ECOE03 - BROADBAND COMMUNICATION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Describe the concepts and applications of Microwave and Millimeter wave communicationCO2 : Comprehend and explain the operation of Satellite communication and navigation systemsCO3 : Illustrate the operation of optical communication systems and high speed networksCO4 : Exemplify the features and functionalities of cellular communication from 2G to 4G and beyondCO5 : Distinguish and describe different wireless technologies based on its features and applications

MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETER WAVE COMMUNICATIONMicrowave concepts - devices and lines - waveguides and cavity resonators -Microwave semiconductor diodes-Microwavetubes - antennas - Microwave and millimeter applications (9)

SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONSatellite orbits - Satellite Communication Systems - Satellite subsystems - Ground stations - Applications - Global Navigationsatellite systems (9)

OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONOptical principles - optical communication systems - fiber optics cables - optical transmitters and receivers - wavelength divisionmultiplexing - passive optical networks -40/100Gbps networks and beyond (9)

CELLPHONE TECHNOLOGIESCellular telephone systems - Cellular industry overview - 2G and 3G digital cell phone systems -Long term evolution and 4Gcellular systems - Base stations and small (9)

WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIESWireless LAN - PANs and Bluetooth - Zigbee and mesh wireless networks - Wi-Max and wireless Meteroploitan area networks- Infrared wireless - Radio frequency identification - Ultra wideband wireless-wireless applications (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Louis E.Frenzel,"Principles of Electronic Communication Systems", Mc-Graw hill Education,4th edition,2016

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Kennedy G, "Electronic Communication Systems", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 1999.2. Rappaport,T.S, "Wireless communications", Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 20103. William Stallings, "Wireless Communications and networks", Pearson Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2009.4. David Tse, Pramod Viswanath, "Fundamentals of Wireless Communication", Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition,

2005.5. Aditya K.Jagannathan, "Principles of Modern Wireless Communication Systems: Theory and Practice", Mc-Graw hill

Education, 2016.

L T P C3 0 0 3

143

15ECOE04 - ROBOTICS FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of industrial robot in the present contemporary worldCO2 : Exemplify the features and functionalities of the sensors in RobotCO3 : Develop different language programs to design and develop robotic based systemsCO4 : Develop system for industrial automation and medical applicationCO5 : Illustrate the methodologies to provide automatic solution for replacing humans in life threatening area

SCOPE OF ROBOTSThe scope of industrial Robots - Definition of an industrial robot - Need for industrial robots -Economic and Social Issues-applications. (4)

ROBOT COMPONENTSFundamentals of Robot Technology - Automation and Robotics - Robot anatomy - Work volume -Precision of movement - Endeffectors - Sensors. (9)

ROBOT PROGRAMMINGRobot Programming - Methods - interlocks textual languages. Characteristics of Robot level languages, characteristic of tasklevel languages. (9)

ROBOT WORK CELLRobot Cell Design and Control - Remote Center compliance - Safety in Robotics. (9)

FUTURE TRENDSTelepresence robot, Autonomous mobile robots, Walker Robots, Solar-ball Robot, Underwater bots, Aerobots, Advanced roboticsin Space - Specific features of space robotics systems - longterm technical developments, Next generation robots. (14)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Robert J. Schilling, "Fundamentals of Robotics- Analysis and Control", Pearson Education, 2006.2. John M. Holland, "Designing Autonomous Mobile Robots-Inside the mind of an Intelligent Machine", Newnes Publication,

2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Mikell P.Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N.Nagel Nicholas G.Odrey, "Industrial Robotics Technology, Programming and

Applications", McGraw Hill Book Company 1986.2. John Iovine, "Robots, Android and Animatronics", Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2012.3. Fu K.S. Gonzaleaz R.C. and Lee C.S.G.,"Robotics Control Sensing, Vision and Intelligence",McGraw Hill, International

Editions, 1987.4. Bernard Hodges and Paul Hallam, "Industrial Robotics", British Library Cataloging in Publication 1990.5. Deb, S.R., "Robotics Technology and flexible automation", Tata McGraw Hill, 1994.

L T P C3 0 0 3

144

15ECOE05 - SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ITS APPLICATIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEUpon completion of this course the students will be able to demonstrate an ability toCO1 : Compute the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of a given discrete time sequence using Radix-2 Fast Fourier Transform

algorithms and design FIR/IIR FiltersCO2 : Apply source coding procedure to calculate coding efficiency based on entropy & mutual information and outline

different pulse analog modulation techniquesCO3 : Analyze various equalization techniques and compare its performanceCO4 : Calculate channel capacity using Shannon's channel capacity theorem and develop channel error control codesCO5 : Analyze speech processing methods in time and frequency domain and design codec methods for speech compression

techniques

ORTHOGONAL TRANSFORMS AND DIGITAL FILTER STRUCTURESDFT-DCT-Properties of DFT- Computation of DFT, FFT and structures-Decimation in time-Decimation in frequency - Linearconvolution using DFTBasic FIR/IIR filter structures-FIR/IIR Cascaded lattice structures-Parallel allpass realization of IIR transfer functions- Sinecosine generator - Computational complexity of filter structures (10)

DATA COMPRESSIONInformation entropy-Source coding-Huffman algorithm-Delta Modulation-Adaptive Delta Modulation- Continuously Variable SlopeDelta Modulation-Differential Pulse Code Modulation - Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. (8)

SIGNAL PROCESSING IN COMMUNICATION RECEIVERTemporal Equalization-Space Time Equalization-Frequency Domain Equalization-Symbol Timing Recovery- Channel QualityEstimation- Automatic Frequency Control-Overall Receiver Block. (9)

ERROR CORRECTING CODES & CHANNEL CODINGError Correcting codes-Error Correction-Linear Blocks Codes-Cyclic Codes- Bose, Chaudhari and Hocquenghem Codes-Convolution Codes-Viterbi Decoding-Interleaving Codes-Concatenated Codes- Turbo Codes. (9)

SPEECH CODINGSpeech Coding-Adaptive Predictive Coding-Sub Band Coding,-Vocoders-Liner Predictive Coding- Image Coding-Joint PhotoGraphic Expert Group(JPEG)-Moving Pictures Expert Group(MPEG), the layer-3 of MPEG-1 Algorithms(MP3),Lempel- ZIVAlgorithms - Recognition techniques:Speech Recognition and Image recognition (9)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. V. Oppenheim, R. W. Shafer and J.R.Buck, "Discrete-Time Signal Processing", Pearson Education, 4th Edition,20112. Simon Haykins, "Digital Communications Systems", 1st Edition, Wiley, 2013.REFERENCE BOOKS1. Sanjit. K. Mitra and Sanjit Kumar Mitra, "Digital Signal Processing - A computer based approach", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th

Edition, 2011.2. Todd K Moon, "Error Correction Coding - Mathematical methods and Algorithms", John Wiley & Sons, 2005.3. Roberto Togneri, Christopher J.S DeSilva, "Fundamentals of Information Theory and Coding Design", CRC press, 20034. L.R.Rabiner and R.W.Schaffer "Digital Processing of Speech signals" Prentice Hall 19785. Nirmal K. Bose, Calyampudi Radhakrishna Rao, "Signal Processing and Its Applications" North-Holland, 1993

L T P C3 0 0 3

145

15CSOE01 - FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the various software life cycle models and choose an appropriate model for a given application.CO2 : Identify the functional requirements, prepare data flow, ER diagrams and Software Requirement Specifications.CO3 : Employ suitable architectural styles, software design methodologies, coding standards and practices in developing

practical applicationsCO4 : Discuss various testing techniques and their application in defect removal.

INTRODUCTIONThe Software Engineering Discipline - Software Development Projects - Software Life Cycle Models: Use of Life Cycle Models- Classical Waterfall Model-Iterative Waterfall Model-Prototype model-Evolutionary Model-Spiral Model (9)

SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND ANALYSISRequirements Analysis and Specification - Requirements Gathering and Analysis- Value of good SRS - Requirement process-Requirement Specification - desirable characteristics, components and Structure of requirements document - FunctionalSpecification with use cases - basics - developing Use Cases -DFDs - Data Dictionary - ER Diagrams. (8)

SOFTWARE DESIGNDesign concepts - Cohesion and Coupling- The Open-Closed Principle - Function Oriented Software Design: Structured charts- Structured design methodology - Detailed Design: Logic / Algorithm design - State Modeling of Classes. (10)

CODINGProgramming principles and guidelines - Structured programming - Information hiding - some programming practices - Codingstandards - Code inspection - Planning- Self review - Group review meeting. (7)

TESTINGTesting Fundamentals -Black Box Testing: Equivalence Class Partitioning - Boundary Value Analysis - White box Testing:Control Flow based criteria - Data Flow based Testing - Levels of Testing: Unit Testing - Integration Testing - System Testing -Acceptance Testing. (11)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Pankaj Jalote, "Software Engineering A precise Approach", Wiley India, Third edition 2012.2. Rajib Mall, "Fundamentals of Software Engineering", PHI Learning Private Limited, Third Edition 2013.( Introduction only)

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Roger.S.Pressman "Software Engineering A Practitioner's Approach", McGraw Hill International Edition, Seventh Edition,

2014.2. Ian Sommerville, "Software Engineering", Dorling Kindersley (India) Private Ltd., Eighth Edition, 2008.

L T P C3 0 0 3

146

15CSOE02 - INTRODUCTION TO DATA WAREHOUSING ANDDATA MINING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the basic concepts, architecture, data models of database management systems and data warehouse.CO2 : Demonstrate the multidisciplinary fields of data mining and illustrate the techniques for data preprocessing.CO3 : Find frequent item set and generate association rules for the given transactions.CO4 : Analyze different types of data using classification and clustering techniques.

BASIC CONCEPTS OF DATABASE SYSTEMPurpose of DBMS - Applications - Views of data - Data Abstraction - Instances and Schemas - Data Models - DatabaseLanguages - Relational Databases - Database Architecture - Database users and administrators - History of Database systems

(8)

DATA MININGData Mining - On What Kind of Data-Data Mining Functionalities - Classification of Data Mining Systems - Data Mining TaskPrimitives - Integration of a Data Mining System with a Database or Data Warehouse System-Major Issues in Data Mining. (9)

DATA WAREHOUSINGData Warehouse - Introduction-Multidimensional Data Model-Data Warehouse Architecture -Data Warehouse Implementation- From Data Warehousing to Data Mining. (8)

DATA PREPROCESSING AND ASSOCIATION RULESData Preprocessing: Needs Preprocessing the Data - Data Cleaning- Data Integration and Transformation-Data Reduction-Discretization and Concept Hierarchy Generation. Associtation Rules: Basic concepts - Apriori Algorithm - Generation ofassociation rules from frequent item sets - FP Tree Algorithm - Pattern evaluation methods (10)

CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATIONCluster analysis - Partitioning Methods - K-Means and K-Medoid algorithm - CLARA - CLARANS - Hierarchical clustering -BIRCH - Density based clustering - DBSCAN - Decision tree induction. (10)

TOTAL : 45TEXT BOOKS1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, "Database System Concepts", Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition,

2013. (Basic Concepts of Database System only)2. Jiawei Han & Micheline kamber, "Data Mining-Concepts and Techniques" Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Third Edition,

2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, "Fundamentals of Database Systems", Pearson Education, Sixth Edition, 2013.2. Arun K Pujari, "Data Mining Techniques" Universities Press India Ltd., Third Edition, 2012.3. Dunham, "Data Mining- Introductory and Advanced Topics", Pearson Education, New Delhi, First Edition, 2006.4. Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, "Data Mining ", Pearson Education, Third Edition 2009,Delhi.5. Sam Anahory, Dennis Murray, "Data Warehousing in the Real World ", Pearson Education, Seventh indian Reprint New

Delhi,2003.6. George M. Marakas, " Modern Data Warehousing, Mining, & Visualization Core concepts", Pearson Education, First

Edition, 20037. Paulraj Ponnaiah, "Data Warehousing Fundamentals", Wiley Publishers, Singapore, First Edition, 2001.

L T P C3 0 0 3

147

15CSOE03 - INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Examine the characteristics and challenges in embedded system developmentCO2 : Identify the parameters affecting CPU performance and develop optimized codeCO3 : Demonstrate the scheduling of given set of real-time tasks using the appropriate scheduling algorithmCO4 : Design embedded system for simple applications

INTRODUCTIONCharacteristics of embedded computing applications- Challenges in embedded computing design - Performance in embeddedcomputing.Embedded System Design Process - Computer Architecture Taxonomy - ARM Processor -Assembly LanguageProgramming. (10)

CPU PERFORMANCEI/O Primitives - Busy -Wait I/O - Interrupts - Memory System Mechanisms: Cache, Memory Management Unit and AddressTranslation - Pipelining - CPU Power Consumption (8)

DEVELOPMENT AND DEBUGGINGDevelopment environments - Debugging Techniques - Debugging challenges - System Level Performance analysis - ProgramLevel Performance analysis - Program Optimization (9)

SCHEDULINGScheduling states of a Process-Running Periodic Processes - Preemption - Priorities- Rate Monotonic Scheduling - EarliestDeadline First Scheduling - Priority Inversion - Data dependency. (10)

NETWORKSBus Standards: I2C, CAN Bus, Field Bus. CASE STUDY: Alarm Clock, Elevator Controller. (8)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Marilyn Wolf, "Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design", Morgan Kaufman, Third

Edition, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Rajib Mall, "Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice", Pearson Education, First Edition, 2009. (For Scheduling)2. David. E. Simon, "An Embedded Software Primer", Pearson Education, First Edition, 20123. Rajkamal, "Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design", McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2014.

L T P C3 0 0 3

148

15CSOE04 - INTERNET PROGRAMMING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Gain knowledge in overview of www and web based applications.CO2 : Design and develop dynamic and Interactive web page using DHTML.CO3 : Design and develop web applications using servlets.CO4 : Gain knowledge on E-business models and E-marketing.

BASIC WEB CONCEPTSBasic Web Concepts - Web based Client/Server model -Web Protocols- Working of web browser - Browser & ServerCommunication - Review of HTML: Markup Languages, Introduction to HTML- forms - frames - tables. (9)

CLIENT SIDE PROGRAMMINGClient-side Programming (Review of JavaScript): Introduction, Writing Comments, Variables, Operators, Statements, Alert,Confirm, and Prompt Boxes, Functions, Event and Error Handling, Introduction to Built-in Classes, Form Validation, Cookies.

(9)

DYNAMIC HTMLDynamic HTML :Introduction - cascading style sheets-object model and collections - event model - filters and transition - databinding - data control - ActiveX control - handling of multimedia data. (9)

SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMINGServlets - Deployment of simple servlets - web server (Java web server / Tomcat / Web logic) - HTTP GET and POST requests- session tracking - cookies - JDBC - simple web applications - Multi-tier applications. (9)

WEB BASED APPLICATIONS AND ITS TECHNOLOGIESRails:Overview of Rails-Ajax:Overview of Ajax Rails with Ajax- e-Business Models-e-Marketing-online payments-Security. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Deital & Deital, "Internet and World Wide Web-How to Program", Pearson Education Fifth Edition, 2011.2. Robert W.Sebesta, "Programming with World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Eighth Edition, 2015.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Scot Johnson, Keith Ballinger,Davis Howard Chapman, "Special Edition Using Active Server Pages", Prentice Hall of

India,paperback 1999.2. Ravi Kalakota and Andrew B Whinston, "Frontiers of e-commerce", Addison Wesley, paperback 1999.3. Jeffrey C. Jackson," Web Technologies: A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, Reprint 2011.4. Elliotte Rusty Harold, "Java Network Programming", O'Reilly Publishers, Fourth Edition 2013.

L T P C3 0 0 3

149

15CSOE05 - CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT ESSENTIALS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : State the evolution of marketing and define CRM architecture explaining customer acquisition, retention and

segmentation.CO2 : Describe the business value, its costs and deploying data mining for CRM with proper guidelines for privacy.CO3 : Demonstrate the scoring process and apply the various CRM optimization techniques to optimize CRM process in

order to improve customer profitability.CO4 : Evaluate CRM tools using tool assessment and methodology to choose the appropriate tool for real time applications.

INTRODUCTIONMost profitable Customer - CRM: Custom centered database, Managing campaigns, Evolution of marketing, Closed loopmarketing, CRM architecture - Customer profitability - Customer acquisition - Cross selling - Customer retention - Customersegmentation. (9)

BUILDING THE BUSINESS CASEIntroduction - Uncovering the needs for data mining - Defining the business value - The costs - Deploying Data mining for CRM:Introduction - Define the problem - Define the user - Define the data - Scope the project - Trial - Quality assurance - Education- Launch - Continuation. (10)

COLLECTING CUSTOMER DATAIntroduction - Three types of customer data - Collecting customer data - Connecting customer - Customer data and privacy -Privacy and data mining - Guidelines for privacy - Legal issues associated with data mining. (8)

SCORING YOUR CUSTOMERIntroduction - Process - Scoring architectures and configurations - Preparing the data - Integrating scoring with other applications- Optimizing the CRM process: Introduction - Improved customer profitability through optimization - Optimized CRM - Completeloop - Optimal CRM process - Optimization techniques. (8)

OVERVIEW OF DATA MINING AND CRM TOOL MARKETSIntroduction - Data mining market place - Taxonomy of data mining tools - Tool assessment attributes and methodology - Toolevaluation - Other data mining tools -CRM tools - Next generation for CRM. (10)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Alex Berson, Stephen Smith, Kurt Thearling, "Building Data mining Applications for CRM", Tata McGraw Hill, Fifteenth

Reprint, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Francis Buttle, Stan Maklan "Customer Relationship Management: Concepts and Technologies", Routledge, Third Edition,

2015.2. Roger J. Baran, Robert J. Galka, "CRM: The Foundation of Contemporary Marketing Strategy", S.Chand (G/L) & Company

Ltd, Second Edition, 2017.

L T P C3 0 0 3

150

15CSOE06 - E-COMMERCE

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the features of e-commerce, various business models and marketing strategies used in e-commerce.CO2 : Use the knowledge on the mechanics of building a secure e-commerce website and payment systems.CO3 : Comprehensive online retailing, marketing and impact of social media.CO4 : Illustrate the procurement process and supply chain management in B2B e-commerce.

INTRODUCTIONE-commerce: E-commerce and E-business - Features of E-commerce Technology - Types of E-commerce. Understanding E-commerce: Technology - Business and Society. E-commerce Business Models and Concepts: Eight Key Elements - Strategy,Structure and Process: Industry Structure - Industry Value Chains - Firm Value Chains - Firm Value Webs - Business Strategy.

(7)

BUILDING E-COMMERCE WEBSITEBuilding an Ecommerce Presence: Systematic Approach - Choosing Software and Hardware: Web Server Software - ApplicationServers - Merchant Server Software Functionality and Packages - Web Services and Open Source Options - Other E-commerceSite Tools - Developing Mobile Website and Building Mobile Applications. (8)

E-COMMERCE SECURITY AND PAYMENT SYSTEMSEcommerce Security Environment - Security Threats - Management Policies, Business Procedures and Public Laws - PaymentSystems - E-commerce Payment Systems. (7)

SOCIAL, MOBILE AND LOCAL MARKETINGIntroduction to Social, Mobile and Local Marketing - Social Marketing: Social Marketing Players - The Social Marketing Process- Face book Marketing - Twitter Marketing - Pinterest Marketing - The Downside of Social Marketing - Mobile Marketing: BasicMobile Marketing Features - Mobile Marketing Tools - Mobile Marketing Campaign - Local and Location Based Marketing:Location Based Marketing Platforms - The Technologies - Marketing Tools - Marketing Campaign - Marketing Results. (8)

ONLINE RETAIL SERVICES, AUCTIONS AND PORTALSE-commerce in Action: E-tailing Business Models: Virtual Merchants - Multi-channel Merchants - Catalog Merchants - ManufacturerDirect - Online Financial Services - Online Travel Services - Online Career Services. Online Auctions: Measuring Growth ofAuctions and Dynamic Pricing - Benefits of Auctions - Risks and Costs of Auctions for Consumers and Businesses. E CommercePortals: Types of Portals - Portal Business Models. (9)

E-COMMERCE, SUPPLY CHAIN AND COLLABORATIVE MANAGEMENTDefining and Measuring the Growth of B2B Commerce - Benefits and Challenges of B2B E-commerce - The ProcurementProcess and Supply Chain - Types of Procurement. Trends in Supply Chain Management and Collaborative Commerce: Just-in-Time and Lean Production - Supply Chain Simplification - Adaptive Supply Chains - Accountable Supply Chains - SustainableSupply Chains - Electronic Data Interchange - Supply Chain Management Systems - Collaborative Commerce. (6)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Kenneth C. Laudon,Carol Guercio Traver, "E-Commerce-Business,Technology, Society", Pearson India, Tenth edition,

2016.

L T P C3 0 0 3

151

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Ravi Kalakota, Andrew Whinston, "Frontiers of Electronic Commerce", Pearson India, fourteenth Reprint 2007.2. Dave Chaffey, "E - Business and E - Commerce Management: Strategy, Implementation, and Practice:" Pearson India,

Sixth Edition, 2013.3. Henry Chan, Raymond Lee, Tharam Dillon, Elizabeth Chang, "E-Commerce, Fundamentals and Applications", Wiley

India Private Ltd Reprint 2008.

152

15ITOE01 - DIGITAL COMPUTER BASICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Explain various schemes of number system representations, code conversions and perform arithmetic operations.CO2 : Describe Boolean Algebra, formulate and simplify Boolean expressions using K-Maps and illustrate the logic gates

realization..CO3 : Describe the working of basic combinational circuits and sequential circuits.CO4 : Describe the structure and functioning of various memory schemes.

NUMBER SYSTEMSBinary Numbers, Number Base Conversions, Octal and Hexadecimal Numbers. Complements of Numbers - Signed BinaryNumbers. Binary Codes : Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) Code, Gray Code, ASCII Character Code, Error Detecting Code. BCDAddition - Decimal Arithmetic. Binary Storage and Registers. (9)

BINARY LOGIC AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRADefinition of Binary logic. Boolean Algebra - Basic Definitions - Theorems and Properties of Boolean Algebra - Canonical andStandard Forms. Digital Logic Gates : Integrated Circuits. Gate-Level Minimization: Map Method - Four Variable K-Map -Product of Sums Simplification. Realization of Boolean functions using Gates. (10)

COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITSAdder : Half Adder - Full Adder - Binary Parallel Adder - BCD Adder. Subtractor : Half Subtractor - Full Subtractor. CodeConversion. Decoders - De-Multiplexer - Encoders - Multiplexers. (9)

SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITSStorage Elements - Latches, Flip Flops - RS,D,JK and T flip - flops - Triggering of flip - flops - Characteristic Tables - CharacteristicEquations. Registers - Shift Registers. Counters: Binary ripple counter - Updown binary counter. (9)

MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGICRandom Access Memory - Memory Decoding - Read Only Memory - Types of ROMs, Programmable Logic Array, ProgrammableArray Logic. (8)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti,"Digital Design with an Introduction to the Verilog HDL, Pearson Education, Fifth

edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. M. Morris Mano, "Digital Logic and Computer Design", Pearson Education, First edition, 2008.2. Thomas L.Floyd, "Digital Fundamentals", Pearson Education, Tenth edition, 2011.

L T P C3 0 0 3

153

15ITOE02 - PROGRAMMING IN JAVA

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the fundamental aspects of object oriented programming paradigm.CO2 : Develop java programs using features like methods, classes, constructors, overloading and string handling.CO3 : Write exception handling routines for practical applications.CO4 : Describe multithreading, synchronization and networking features of Java.CO5 : Demonstrate use of applets and database connectivity in developing practical Applications.

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMINGIntroduction to object oriented languages - Evolution of object oriented languages - Object oriented programming paradigm -Basic concepts of object oriented programming - Procedural Vs object oriented programming. (6)

INTRODUCTION TO JAVAJava and Internet - Byte Code - Features of Java - Java Development Environment- Java Programming: Methods and Classes- Constructor - Garbage Collection - Overloading - Inheritance - Overriding - Packages and Interfaces - Java IO systems - StringHandling : String and String Buffer. (12)

EXCEPTION HANDLINGException Handling: Fundamentals of Exception handling and types - Built in Exceptions - user defined Exceptions. (5)

MULTI THREADSMultithreaded Programming : Thread Model - Thread properties - Thread priorities -Synchronization- Inter thread communication-Networking : Inet address - Datagrams - Sockets - URL connections. (11)

APPLET AND DATABASE CONNECTIVITYIntroduction to Abstract Window Tool kit - Applet class - HTML applet tags - Parameter passing - Audio clip interface - Eventclass: Keyboard and Mouse events handling. (11)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Herbert Schilt :" Java 2 - Complete references ", Tata McGraw Hill, Ninth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Deitel H.M and Deitel P.J, "Java - How to Program", Prentice Hall of India, Ninth Edition, 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

154

15ITOE03 - FUNDAMENTALS OF DATABASE SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the database system concepts and explain the key features of Relational data models.CO2 : Describe the features of Entity Relationship diagram and draw Entity Relationship diagram for the given real world

applicationCO3 : Design a normalized database system and carry out data retrieval using SQL.CO4 : Demonstrate various transaction concepts and various concurrency control mechanisms

DATABASE SYSTEMSData Vs Information-Introducing the database and DBMS- Importance of Database Design- Files and File systems-Problemswith File System Data Management, Database Systems.Relational Database Model: Logical view of Data- Keys- Integrity Rules- Relational Set Operators- Data Dictionary and thesystem catalog -Codd's relational database rules. (10)

RELATIONAL MODELEntity Relationship Model: Entities-Attributes-Relationship-Connectivity and cardinality-Existence Dependence-RelationshipStrength-Weak Entities-Relationship participation-Relationship Degree-Recursive Relationship-Developing an ER Diagram.

(8)

STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGEIntroduction to SQL- Data Definition Commands- Data Manipulation Commands-Advanced Data Definition and SELECTCommands - Virtual Tables -Creating Views- Joining Database Tables. (8)

DATABASE DESIGNDatabase Tables and Normalization- Need for Normalization- Normalization Process-Improving the Design-Surrogate KeyConsiderations, High level Normal Forms, Normalization and Database Design-Denormalization. (10)

TRANSACTION MANAGEMENTTransaction Concepts: Transaction Properties- Transaction Concurrent Executions. Concurrency control with Locking Methods:Lock Granularity-Lock Types-Two-Phase Locking to Ensure Serializablity-Deadlocks-Database Recovery Management-RAID.

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Peter Rob, Corlos M.Coronel, "Database Systems: Design, Implementation and Management", Thompson Learning Course

Technology, Tenth edition, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F.Korth,S.Sudharshan,"Database System Concepts", McGraw-Hill, Sixth Edition, 2013.2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, "Fundamentals of Database Systems", Pearson Education, Sixth Edition, 2013.3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, "Database Management Systems", McGraw Hill Education, Third Edition, 2014.4. Thomas M.Connolly and Carolyn E.Begg, " A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and Management", Pearson,

6th Edition, 2014.

L T P C3 0 0 3

155

15ITOE04 - CLOUD COMPUTING FUNDAMENTALS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOME

CO1 : Understanding the client- server, distributed collaborative and cloud computing architecture along with cloud storageand services.

CO2 : Classify the different virtualization environments and techniques.

CO3 : Illustrate various services deployed from a cloud architecture supported by different providers.

CO4 : Analyze the major security challenges and privacy problems in the cloud and virtual environment.

INTRODUCTION

Understanding Cloud Computing- history of cloud computing: Client/Server computing, Peer to peer computing, Distributedcomputing and Collaborative computing.- Understanding cloud architecture, cloud storage and services-Pros and cons of cloudcomputing. (9)

VIRTUALIZATION

Introduction-Characteristics of Virtualized Environments - Taxonomy of Virtualization Techniques - Virtualization and CloudComputing - Pros and Cons of Virtualization - Technology Examples (9)

CLOUD COMPUTING ARCHITECTURE

Cloud reference model: Architecture, Infrastructure / Hardware as a service, Platform as a service-Software as a service, Typesof cloud: Public clouds, Private clouds, Hybrid Cloud, Community Clouds. (9)

CLOUD SERVICES

Discovering Cloud services Development services and tools: Amazon, Google App Engine, IBM, Salesforce.com, Other CloudServices development tools. (9)

CLOUD SECURITY

Security Overview - Cloud Security Challenges - Software as a Service Security - Security Governance - Risk Management -Security Monitoring - Security Architecture Design - Data Security - Application Security - Virtual Machine Security. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS

1. Michael Miller, "Cloud Computing: Web-Based Applications That Change the Way You Work and Collaborate Online",1stEdition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, and Thamarai Selvi, "Mastering Cloud Computing", Tata McGraw Hill,2013.(Virtualization, Cloud Computing Architecture)

3. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, "Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and Security", CRC Press,2010. (Cloud Security)

L T P C3 0 0 3

156

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, "Cloud Computing, A Practical Approach", McGraw-Hill Osborne Media,2009.

2. Tom White, "Hadoop: The Definitive Guide", Yahoo Press, 2012.

3. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, "Distributed and Cloud Computing, From Parallel Processing to the Internetof Things", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.

157

15ITOE05 - INFORMATION SECURITY FUNDAMENTALS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Identify and analyze the security threats and attacks and apply device suitable security policies and standards.CO2 : Assess the risks and apply suitable risk control strategies.CO3 : Employ appropriate intrusion detection and prevention systems to ensure information security.CO4 : Discuss various national and international laws of information security and its framework.

INTRODUCTION, NEED FOR SECURITYIntroduction to Information Security - The History of Information Security- Critical Characteristics of Information - NSTISSCSecurity Model - Components of an Information System - Securing Components - Balancing Information Security and Access -The Systems Development Life Cycle - The Security Systems Development Life Cycle. The Need for Security: Introduction -Business Needs First -Threats -Attacks. (5)

RISK MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION SECURITYIntroduction - An Overview of Risk Management - Risk Identification -Risk Assessment - Risk Control Strategies - Selecting aRisk Control Strategy - Risk Management Discussion Points - Recommended Practices in Controlling Risk. (6)

POLICIES, STANDARDS, PRACTICES AND BUSINESS CONTINUITYIntroduction - Information Security Policy, Standards and Practices -The Information Security Blueprint: ISO 17799/BS 7799,ISO 27001and its controls, NIST Security Models, Design of Security Architecture - Security Education, Training and AwarenessProgram - Continuity Strategies. (6)

SECURITY TECHNOLOGYIntroduction - Intrusion Detection and Prevention Systems: IDPS Terminology, Use of IDPS, Strengths and Limitations of IDPS- Honey Pots, Honey Nets, and Padded Cell Systems - Scanning and Analysis Tools, Access Control Devices - (8)

BIOMETRIC CONTROLSBiometrics - Nature of Biometrics Identification/Authentication Techniques - Biometric Techniques - Matching and EnrollmentProcess in Biometrics - Benefits Over Traditional Authentication Methods. (6)

SECURITY OF WIRELESS NETWORKSAttacks on Wireless Networks: Other Security Risks in Wireless Networks, Management and Mitigations for Wireless NetworksAttacks. (7)

LAWS AND LEGAL FRAMEWORKIntroduction - Information Security and the Law: The Rising Need -Understanding the Laws for Information Security: A ConceptualFramework - The Indian IT Act - Laws for Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) -Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act(HIPAA) - Building Security into Software/System Development Life Cycle. (7)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, "Principles of Information Security", Course Technology, New Delhi, Fourth

Edition, 2012 Reprint.2. Nina Godbole, "Information Systems Security-Security Management, Metrics, Frameworks and Best Practices", Wiley

India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, First Edition, 2009.(Biometric Controls, Security of Wireless Networks, Laws and LegalFramework)

L T P C3 0 0 3

158

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Thomas R.Peltier, "Information Security Fundamentals", Auerbach Publications, Second Edition, 2013.2. Micki Krause and Harold F.Tipton, "Information Security Management Handbook", Auerbach Publications, Sixth Edition,2008.3. Mark Merkow and Jim Breithaupt," Information Security - Principles & Practices", Second Edition, Pearson Education,

2014.

159

15ITOE06 - INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the importance and need for effective user friendly Graphical User Interfaces(GUI).CO2 : Choose suitable interactions devices/tools to meet application specific requirements.CO3 : Design Graphical User Interfaces(GUI) using apt components and apply the design guidelines for user-friendly navigation

and presentation.CO4 : Asses graphical user interfaces for compliance against the screen design guidelines.

INTRODUCTIONImportance of User Interface: Definition-Importance of good design-Benefits of good design-Human-centered developmentand Evaluation-Human Performance models-A Brief history of screen design. (9)

THE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE & DESIGN PROCESSGUI: Popularity of graphics - The concept of direct manipulation - Graphical system -Characteristics - Web user - InterfacePopularity - Characteristics and Principles of User Interface.Design process: Human Interaction with computers - Importance of Human Characteristics - Human Consideration - HumanInteraction Speeds and Understanding Business Junctions. (9)

SCREEN DESIGNINGDesign Goals - Screen Planning and Purpose - Organizing Screen Elements - Ordering of Screen Data and Content - ScreenNavigation and Flow - Visually Pleasing Composition - Amount of Information - Focus and Emphasis - Presenting InformationSimply and Meaningfully - Information retrieval on web - Statistical Analysis - Technological considerations in Interface Design.

(11)

WINDOWS & COMPONENTSWindows: New Navigation Schemes - Selection of Window - Selection of Devices Based on Screen Based Controls.Components: Text and Messages - Icons and Increases - Multimedia - Colors - Uses -Problems - Choosing colors. (9)

SOFTWARE TOOLS AND INTERACTION DEVICESSpecification Methods - Interface Building Tools - Keyboard and Function Keys - Pointing Devices Speech Recognition. (7)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Wilbert O Galitz, "The Essential Guide to User Interface Design", Third Edition, Wiley India Pvt., Ltd., 2007.2. Ben Shneidermann, "Designing the User Interface", Fifth edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2013. (Software Tools and

Interaction Devices)

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, G D Abowd and Russel Beale, "Human Computer Interaction", Pearson Education, Third Edition,

2004.

L T P C3 0 0 3

160

15ITOE07 - ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING CONCEPTS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Describe the operational aspects of ERP system and its related technologies.CO2 : Demonstrate the steps required for ERP Project management and implementation process by choosing the right

vendors/consultants, employee training and monitoring.CO3 : Categorize the business modules of an ERP package inorder to define the functionality of various departments in a

company.CO4 : Analyze the ERP marketplace and its vendors, and assess how Enterprise Application Integration (EAI), e-business

help the company use ERP to its utmost benefit.

INTRODUCTIONEnterprise - An Overview - Introduction to ERP - Benefits Of ERP - ERP and Related Technologies - Business ProcessReengineering (BPR) - Data Warehousing - Data Mining -OLAP - SCM. (9)

ERP IMPLEMENTATIONERP Implementation Lifecycle - Implementation Methodologies - ERP deployment methods - Package Selection - ProcessDefinition - Vendors and Consultants - Contract with Vendors, Consultants and Employees - Training and education- ProjectManagement and Monitoring. (10)

THE ERP BUSINESS MODULESBusiness modules of an ERP Package - Finance - Manufacturing - Human Resources - Plant Maintenance - MaterialsManagement - Quality Management - Sales and Distribution. (9)

THE ERP MARKET & ERP - Present and FutureERP Marketplace and Marketplace Dynamics - ERP Vendors - SAP AG, Oracle Corporation, Microsoft Dynamics, EPICOR,QAD, RAMCO Systems - Enterprise Application Integration (EAI)- ERP and E-Business- Future Directions and Trends in ERP.

(9)

SAPGateway to SAP: Architecture of SAP R/3 -SAP Integrated-Three Tier Architecture - SAP Easy Access - Understanding ABAPWorkbench (8)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Alexis Leon," ERP Demystified", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2014.2. Dreamtech Press, "SAP R/3, Black Book", Dreamtech Software Team, 2006. (SAP)

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Ellen F.Monk, Bret Wagner, "Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning", Course Technology Ptr, Fourth Edition, 2013.2. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan N.K., "Enterprise Resource Planning - Concepts and Practice", Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

161

15CHOE01 - INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter completion of the course, students are able toCO1 : Practice the safety norms and inspect turning machines, boring machines, milling machine, planning machine, grinding

machines, CNC machines and wood working machinery to create risk free working environment.CO2 : Assess the adequacy of machinery guarding to eliminate or reduce the hazards from the point operation, flying chips

and sparks and moving parts.CO3 : Apply t the safety concepts in welding, gas cutting,storage and handling of gas cylinders, metal forming processes,

etc.,CO4 : Predict, identify and evaluate, hazardous conditions and practices safety rules in in cold forming and hot working of

metalsCO5 : Employ the safety rules in inspection and testing process and take plan the preventive measures in health and welfare

of workers'aspects in engineering industry.

SAFETY IN METAL WORKING MACHINERY AND WOOD WORKING MACHINESGeneral safety rules, principles, maintenance, Inspections of turning machines, boring machines, milling machine, planningmachine and grinding machines, CNC machines, Wood working machinery, types,safety principles, electrical guards, workarea, material handling,inspection, standards and codes- saws, types, hazards. (9)

PRINCIPLES OF MACHINE GUARDINGGuarding during maintenance, Zero Mechanical State (ZMS), Definition,Policy for ZMS - guarding of hazards - point of operationprotectivedevices, machine guarding, types, fixed guard, interlock guard,automatic guard, trip guard, electron eye, positionalcontrol guard, fixedguard fencing- guard construction- guard opening. Selection andsuitability: lathe - drilling - boring - milling -grinding - shaping - sawing- shearing presses - forge hammer - flywheels - shafts - couplings -gears - sprockets wheels andchains pulleys and belts - authorized entryto hazardous installations-benefits of good guarding systems (9)

SAFETY IN WELDING AND GAS CUTTINGGas welding and oxygen cutting, resistance welding, arc welding and cutting, common hazards, personal protective equipment,training,safety precautions in brazing, soldering and metalizing - explosive welding, selection, care and maintenance of theassociated equipment and instruments - safety in generation, distribution and handling ofindustrial gases-colour coding - flashbackarrestor - leak detection-pipeline safety-storage and handling of gas cylinders. (9)

SAFETY IN COLD FORMING AND HOT WORKING OF METALSCold working, power presses, point of operation safe guarding, auxiliarymechanisms, feeding and cutting mechanism, hand orfoot-operatedpresses, power press electric controls, power press set up and dieremoval, inspection and maintenance-metalsheers-press brakes. Hotworking safety in forging, hot rolling mill operation, safe guards in hotrolling mills - hot bending ofpipes, hazards and control measures.Safety in gas furnace operation, cupola, crucibles, ovens, foundry healthhazards, workenvironment, material handling in foundries, foundryproduction cleaning and finishing foundry processes. (9)

SAFETY IN FINISHING, INSPECTION AND TESTINGHeat treatment operations, electro plating, paint shops, sand and shotblasting, safety in inspection and testing, dynamic balancing,hydrotesting, valves, boiler drums and headers, pressure vessels, air leaktest, steam testing, safety in radiography, personalmonitoring devices,radiation hazards, engineering and administrative controls, Indian Boilers Regulation. Health and welfaremeasures in engineering industry-pollution control in engineering industry-industrial waste disposal (9)

TOTAL : 45

L T P C3 0 0 3

162

TEXT BOOKS1. Wells G.L.,R.M.C. Seagrave-Flow sheeting for safety, Indian Institute of Chemical Engineering, London U.K,1977.2. TrevurKletz Butterworth, Learning from accidents, - London, 1988.3. John Barton and Richard Rogers, Chemical reaction Hazards - A guide to safety, Institution of Chemical Engineering

London, 1997.4. Philip Hagan "Accident Prevention Manual for Business and Industry", N.S.C.Chicago, 13th edition 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Rohatgi A.K, Safety handling of Hazardous Chemicals Enterprises, Bombay, 1986.2. Shukla S.K., Envirohazards and Techno Legal aspects, Shashi Publications, Jaipur India, 1993.3. John V.Grimaldi and Rollin H.Simonds," Safety Management", Richard D Irwin, 1994.4. Krishnan N.V. "Safety Management in Industry" Jaico Publishing House, Bombay, 1997.5. "The Indian boilers act 1923 with amendments", Law Publishers (India) Pvt. Ltd., Allahabad.6. "Health and Safety in welding and Allied processes", Welding Institute, UK, High Tech. Publishing Ltd., London, 1989.7. "Safe use of wood working machinery", HSE,UK,2005.

163

15CHOE02- RISK ANALYSIS AND HAZOP

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter completion of the course, students are able toCO1 : Identify individual hazards in a process and deduce the associated risks.CO2 : Identify radiation intensity and effects of explosionCO3 : Perform risk analysis of various types of problemsCO4 : Evaluate effect about key hazard identification techniquesCO5 : Apply risk analysis techniques and Hazop study

INTRODUCTION AND DISPERSION MODELSRisk analysis introduction, quantitative risk assessment, rapid risk analysis - Comprehensive risk analysis - Emission anddispersion - Leak rate calculation. Single and two-phase flow - Dispersion model for dense gas - Flash fire - Plume dispersion- Toxic dispersion model - Ealuation of risk. (9)

RADIATION INTENSITYRadiation - Tank on fire - Flame length - Radiation intensity calculation and its effect on plant, people and property radiationVCVCE - Explosion due to over pressure - Effects of explosion, risk contour -Effects, explosion, BLEVE - Jet fire - Fire ball.

(9)

RISK ANALYSISOverall risk analysis - Generation of meteorological data - Ignition data - Population data - Consequences analysis and total riskanalysis - Overall risk contours for different failure scenarios - Disaster management plan - Emergency planning - On site andoff site emergency planning, risk management ISO 14000, EMS models case studies - Marketing terminal, gas processingcomplex, refinery. (9)

HAZARD ANALYSISHazard identification safety audits, checklist, what if analysis, vulnerability models event tree analysis fault tree analysis, Hazanpast accident analysis Fixborough - Mexico - Madras - Vizag - Bopal analysis (9)

CASE STUDIESHazop - Guide words, parameters, derivation - Causes - Consequences - Recommendation - Coarse Hazop study - Casestudies - Pumping system - Reactor - Mass transfer system. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Ragavan K.V., Khan A.A., Methodologies in Hazard identification and assessment -Manual, CLRI publication, 1990.2. Marcel.V.C., Major Chemical Hazard, Ellis Hawood Ltd., Chi Chester, UK, 1987.3. Skeleton B., Process Safety Analysis, Institution of chemical Engineers, U.K., 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Daniel A Crowl., Louvar J.F., Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2002.

L T P C3 0 0 3

164

15CHOE03 - GREEN TECHNOLOGY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter completion of the course, students are able toCO1 : Outline the green technology concepts and relevance in twenty first century requirements.CO2 : Defend the environmental and sustainability issues, role of CSR and CER and Indian corporate structure and

environment.CO3 : Recall the indicators of sustainability and their use and can also find the alternate theories.CO4 : Criticize the environmental reporting, ISO 14001, ISO 14064, financial initative by UNEP, etc.CO5 : Analyze the green tax incentives and rebates, business redesign and its models.

INTRODUCTIONThe concept of green technology; evolution; nature, scope, importance and types; developing a theory; green technology inIndia; relevance in twenty first century. (9)

SUSTAINABILITY & ENVIRONMENTOrganizational environment; internal and external environment; Indian corporate structure and environment; how to go green;spreading the concept in organization; environmental and sustainability issues for the production of high-tech components andmaterials, life cycle analysis of materials, sustainable production and its role in corporate social responsibility (CSR) andcorporate environmental responsibility (CER). (9)ECOSYSTEM APPROACHESApproaches from ecological economics; indicators of sustainability; ecosystem services and their sustainable use; bio-diversity;Indian perspective; alternate theories (9)

ACTS OF GREEN TECHNOLOGYEnvironmental reporting and ISO 14001; climate change business and ISO 14064; green financing; financial initiative by UNEP;green energy technology; green product technology. (9)

GREEN ECONOMICSDefinition; green techniques and methods; green tax incentives and rebates (to green projects and companies); green projecttechnology in action; business redesign; eco-commerce models. (9)

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Green Technology and Green Technologies: Exploring the Causal Relationship by Jazmin Seijas Nogarida, 2008.2. Green Marketing and Technology: A global Perspective by John F. Whaik, 2005.3. The Green Energy Technology Book by Leo A. Meyer.4. Green Project Technology by Richard Maltzman and David Shiden.5. Green Marketing by JacquelinOttman.6. Green and World by Andrew S. Winston.

L T P C3 0 0 3

165

15CHOE04 - CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Classify the types of corrosion and theories and also relate the various controlled corrosion process.CO2 : Examine the factors involved in the corrosion and control methods of various corrosion.CO3 : Analyze the mechanism of corrosion and evaluate the effects like pH, temperature, flow rate on corrosion.CO4 : Design and develop the corrosion control methods like cathodic protection, sacrificial anode and impressed current

anodes and anodic protection.CO5 : Predict the different corrosion testing, monitoring and inspection tests by surface analytical studies.

INTRODUCTIONIntroduction, classification, economics and cost of corrosion.emf series, galvanic series, corrosion theories derivation of potential- Current relations of activities controlled and diffusion controlled corrosion process. Potential - pH diagram, Fe-H2O system,application and limitation. Passivation - Definition, anodic passivation theory of passivation, oxidation laws, effects of oxygenand alloying on oxidation rates. (9)

CORROSION CONTROL METHODSForms of corrosion - Definition, factors and control methods of various forms of corrosion such as pitting, inter granular, crevice,dezincification, stress corrosion, corrosion fatigue, fretting corrosion, hydrogen embitterment, corrosion processes and controlmethods in fertilizers, petrochemical, chemical building industries (9)

MECHANISM OF CORROSIONEnvironmental aspects, atmospheric corrosion - Classification, factors influencing atmospheric corrosion, temporary corrosionpreventive methods, corrosion in immersed condition, effect of dissolved gases, salts, pH, temperature, and flows rates oncorrosion, marine corrosion, underground corrosion. Biological corrosion, definition, mechanism of corrosion, control of bio-corrosion. (9)

CORROSION PREVENTIONCorrosion control aspects, electrochemical methods of protection-theory of cathodic protection design of cathodic protection,sacrificial anodes, impressed current anodes, anodic protection. Corrosion inhibitors for acidic, neutral and alkaline media,cooling water system - Boiler water system.Organic coating, surface preparation, natural, synthetic resin, paint, formulation andapplication. Design aspects in corrosion prevention, corrosion resistant materials. (9)

CORROSION TESTCorrosion testing, monitoring and inspection, laboratory corrosion tests, accelerated chemical tests for studying different formsof corrosion. Electrochemical methods of corrosion rate measurements by DC and AC methods, corrosion monitoring methods,chemical and electrochemical removal of corrosion products, newer techniques to study corrosion processes, inspection methodsby NDT. Surface analytical techniques such as AES, ESCA, SEM. Evaluation of paints by conventional and electrochemicalmethods. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Roberge P. R., Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 2008.2. Fontana M.G., Greene N.D., Corrosion Engineering, Third Edition, McGraw Hill, NewYork, 2005.3. Uhling H. H., Revie R.W., Corrosion and Corrosion Control, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1985.

REFERENCE BOOK1. Banarjee.S.N., An introduction to corrosion and corrosion inhibitors, Oxonian Press Ltd., New Delhi, 1985.

L T P C3 0 0 3

166

15CHOE05 - INTRODUCTION TO CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEAfter successful completion of this course, the students will be able toCO1 : Express the fundamentals of chemical engineering and to solve problems.CO2 : Ability to develop basic fluid concepts, transfer and separation operations.CO3 : Design equipments for transport and separation processes.CO4 : Apply material and Energy balance to precisely calculate material required for a process.CO5 : Apply steady state balances to develop process flow sheets.

OVERVIEW OF CHEMICAL ENGINEERINGConcepts of unit operations and unit processes, and more recent developments, The Chemical Industry-scope, features &characteristics. Flow sheets, and symbols for various operations. (9)

MATERIAL AND ENERGY BALANCE CALCULATIONSMaterial balances in simple systems involving physical changes and chemical reactions; systems involving recycle, purge, andbypass, combustion reactions, Forms of energy, optimum utilization of energy, Energy balance calculations in simple systems.Introduction to Computer aided calculations-steady state material and energy balances, combustion reactions. (9)

BASIC FLUID CONCEPTSDimensions and Units, Velocity and Stress Fields, Viscosity and surface tension, Non Newtonian viscosity, Dimensional Analysis(Buckingham PI theorem), Types of flows, Methods of Analysis, Fluid Statics. pipe flow, Pumps, Agitation and Mixing, Compressors.

(9)

HEAT TRANSFER OPERATIONSReview of conduction, resistance concept, extended surfaces, lumped capacitance; Introduction to Convection, natural andforced convection, correlations; Radiation; Heat exchangers- Fundamental principles and classification of heat exchangers,Evaporators. (9)

MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONSFundamental principles and classification of Distillations, Adsorption, Absorption, Drying, Extraction, Membrane Process.Energyand Mass Conservation in process systems and industries.Introduction to chemical reactors. (9)

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. G.T. Austin, R.N. Shreve, Chemical Process Industries, 5th Ed., McGraw Hill, 1984.2. W.L. McCabe, J.C. Smith and P. Harriott, Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.3. R. M. Felder and R.W. Rousseau, Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes, 3rd Ed., John Wiley, New York,2004.4. L.B. Anderson and L.A. Wenzel, Introduction to Chemical Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1961.5. H.S. Fogler, Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering, 4th Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

167

15MOE01 - GRAPH THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will be able to understand the idea of graph theory and to solve the real time problem.CO2 : To relate the Graph theory Algorithms' in their field of engineering and apply the same in their respective main stream.CO3 : To become familiar with Special graphs for modeling the networks.CO4 : Able to design and solve Coloring concepts for defined problems.CO5 : Model the networks using graph theory.

GRAPHS AND SUBGRAPHSGraph --Standard Concepts in Graphs - Subgraphs -Complete Graph - Bipartite Graph - Isomorphism - Adjacency Matrix andIncidence Matrix - Walk, Trail and Path -Bipartite Graph -Connectedness- The Shortest Path Problem- Disjkstra's Algorithm

(9)

TREESTrees- Characterization- Blocks - Block Graphs - Cayley's Formula - Spanning Trees- Spanning Tree Algorithms - Kruskal's andPrim's Algorithm (9)

EULERIAN AND HAMILTONIAN GRAPHSEulerian graphs - Euler's theorem -Hamiltonian graphs - Dirac's and Ore's theorems - Closure of a graph - Bondy-Chvataltheorem - Traveling salesman problem -The Chinese Postman Problem- Fleury's Algorithm. (9)

COVERING AND COLORINGCovering - Independent Sets - Matching - Perfect Matching- Applications- The Personal Assignment Problem- Coloring - ChromaticNumber - Four Color Problem - Chromatic Polynomials - Application. (9)

DIRECTED GRAPHSDigraph - orientation - strongly, weakly and unilaterally connected digraphs - directed acyclic graph - adjacency matrix andincidence matrix of graph - Network Flows- Transport Networks- Max-Flow Min- Cut Theorem- Activity Network (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Gary Chatrand and Ping Zhang, Introduction to Graph Theory, McGraw Hill Education (India), 2006.2. Narsingh Deo, "Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer Science", Prentice Hall of India Private

Limited, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Douglas B.West, "Introduction to Graph Theory" II Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2000.2. Reinhard Diestel, "Graph Theory", II Edition, Springer Publications, 2006.3. Clark J. and Holton D.A, "A First Look at Graph Theory", Allied Publishers, 1995.4. Frank Harary, Graph Theory, 10th Edition, Narosa Publishing House, 2001.

L T P C3 0 0 3

168

15MOE02 - METHODS OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will be able to understand the idea of integral equations and to solve the real time problems.CO2 : To familiarize the students with basic concept of ordinary differential equations, special functions and solve problems

associated with engineering applications.CO3 : To achieve an understanding of the basic concepts of boundary value problems and characteristic function

representations and method of solving them.CO4 : Able to construct and solve a mathematical model for heat flow problems in real life situationCO5 : Able to use the concepts of Calculus of variations and basic concepts for solving equations involving functional

INTEGRAL EQUATIONSRelation between integral and differential equations - Green's function. Fredholum's equation with separable Kernals HilbertSchmidt theory, interactive methods for solving equations of second kind. (9)

SECOND ORDER ORDINARY DIFFERENTITAL EQUATIONS AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONSSingular points, Series solutions and the methods of Frobenius, Bessel Equation, Bessel Functions, modified Bessel functionsand their properties, Ber and Bei functions. (9)

BOUNDARY PROBLEMS AND CHARACTERISTIC FUNCTION REPRESENTATIONSSturm - Liouviller problems. Orthogonal functions and expansions in series of Orthogonal functions. Stodola and Vianellomethod for Sturm - Liouviller problems Fourier, Fourier - Bessel and Legedre Series (9)

PARTIAL DIFFERENTITAL EQUATIONSLinerar and quasi - linear equations of the first and second order. Characterstics of first and second order linear equations. Heatflow equations. Problems in one, two and three dimensions. Fourier method. (9)

INTEGRAL TRANSFORM METHODSCalculus of variations - Variational notation, Constraints and Lagarangian multipliers, variable and points, Rayleigh - Ritz method.

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. M.K.Venkatraman, Higher Mathematics for Engineering and Science, Third Edition, The National Publishing Company,

(2014)2. F.B. Hildebrand : Advanced Calculus for applications second Edn. (EEE). Prentice Hall of India P. Ltd., (2014)

REFERENCE BOOKS1. F.B. Hildebrand - Methods of Applied Mathematics, Second Edn. Prentice Hall of India P.Ltd., (2012)2. C.Stephenson : An introduction to partial differential equation for Science students, ELBS.3. E. D. Rainville : Special Functions.4. Dettman : Mathematical methods in physics and Engineering.

L T P C3 0 0 3

169

15MOE03 - LINEAR AND NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will be able to understand the idea of linear Programming problems and to solve the real time problems.CO2 : To familiarize the students with basic concept of Transportation models and solve problems associated with engineering

applications.CO3 : To achieve an understanding of the basic concepts of Assignment problems and method of solving them.CO4 : Able to construct and solve a Game theory models in real life situationCO5 : Able to use the concepts of Non-linear Programming problems for solving Constrained and unconstrained equations.

LINEAR PROGRAMMINGFormulation of LPP - Graphical methods for two variables - The Simplex method - Artificial Variables Techniques - Big M -method -The Two Phase method - Dual Simplex Method (9)

TRANSPORTATION MODELMathematical formulation of a Transportation problem -Methods for finding initial basic feasible solution - North West corner rule-Least cost method - Vogle's Approximation method -Modified distribution method - Degeneracy in Transportation problems.

(9)

ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMMathematical formulation of an Assignment problem - Hungarian Method - Unbalanced Assignment Models - Maximizationcase in Assignment Problems - Restrictions in Assignments -Travelling Salesman Problem. (9)

GAME THEORYTwo person zero- sum Games -The Maxmini - Minimax Principle -Saddle Point and value of the game - Games without saddlepoints, Mixed Strategies-Matrix Oddment method for n×n games -Dominance Property-Graphical Method of 2× n or m×2 games.

(9)

NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMINGNon-linear Programming Algorithm - Unconstrained Non-linear Algorithms - Constrained Non-linear Lagrange multipliers, Kuhn-Tucker optimality conditions. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Operations Research An Introduction, Eight Edition, Hamdy A.TAHA, Pearson Prentice Hall 2007, New Delhi2. Resource management techniques by V.Sundaresan, Tenth Edition, 2016 A.R Publications, Chennai

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Andrews L.C. and Phillips R.L., "Mathematical Techniques for Engineers and Scientists", Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2005.2. O'Neil, P.V., "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2003.

L T P C3 0 0 3

170

15MOE04 - PROBABILITY AND RANDOM PROCESSES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will be able to understand the idea probability problems and to solve the real time problems.

CO2 : To familiarize the students with basic concept of probability distributions and solve problems associated with engineeringapplications.

CO3 : To achieve an understanding of the basic concepts of Correlation and regression and method of solving them.

CO4 : Able to solve a signal processing problems by using random process concepts.

CO5 : Able to use the concepts of Correlation functions and Power spectral densities for solving Electrical and Electronicsproblem.

THEORY OF PROBABILITYSample Space, Events, Axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Independent events, Theorem of total probability, Baye'sTheorem. (9)

PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONSDefinition of Discrete and Continuous random VariablesDiscrete distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Geometric - Properties and Simple problemsContinuous distributions: Normal, Uniform Exponential - Properties and Simple problems. (9)

CORRELATION AND REGRESSIONCorrelation - Meaning and scope of Correlation - Scatter diagram, Karl Pearson's co-efficient of Correlation, Spearman's RankCorrelation, Multiple Correlation and partial correlation - simple problems.Regression Analysis - Meaning and Scope of regression- Regression in two variables - Uses of Regression. (9)

RANDOM PROCESSESClassification - Stationary process - Markov process - Poisson process - Random telegraph process. (9)

CORRELATION FUNCTIONS AND POWER SPECTRAL DENSITIESAuto Correlation functions -Cross Correlation functions -Properties -Power spectral density - Cross spectral density -Properties.

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. S.C.Gupta and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamental of Mathematical Statistics, Tenth revised edition ,2002.

2. T.Veerarajan, Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, Second Edition, TataMcGraw-Hill 2007

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Rohatgi V.K. (2002) : Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, Wiley. 2. Bhat, B. R. (2005) : Modern Probability Theory - An

Introductory Text Book, Third Edition, New Age International.

2. Cochran, W.G.(2007): Sampling Techniques, Wiley Eastern Private Limited

L T P C3 0 0 3

171

3. Sukhatme, P.V. and Sukhatme, B.V.(1977): Sampling Theory of Survey with Applications, Asia publishing House.

4. Venkataraman M.K, "Higher mathematics for Engineering and Science" National Publishing Company ,2000

5. Ibe , O.C., "Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random processes", 1st Indian Reprint , Elsevier , 2007.

6. Peebles , P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles", Tata McGraw Hill , 4th Edition , New Delhi,2002.

172

15POE01 - INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Demonstrate the understanding of length scales concepts, nanostructures and nanotechnology.CO2 : Understand the different classes of nanomaterials.CO3 : Identify the principles of processing, manufacturing and characterization of nanomaterials and nanostructures.CO4 : Outline the applications of nanotechnology and develop an ability to critically evaluate the promise of a nanotechnology

device.

BASICS OF NANOTECHNOLOGYIntroduction - Time and length scale in structures -Definition of a nanosystem -Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena-Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms - Surface energy and surface stress- surface defects-Effect of nanoscale onvarious properties - Structural,thermal, mechanical,magnetic, optical and electronic properties. (9)

DIFFERENT CLASSES OF NANOMATERIALSClassification based on dimensionality-Quantum Dots,Wells and Wires- Carbon based nano materials (buckyballs, nanotubes,graphene)- Metal based nanomaterials (nanogold, nanosilver and metal oxides) - Nanocomposites-Nanopolymers - Nanoceramics -Biological nanomaterials. (9)

SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALSChemical Methods:Metal Nanocrystals by Reduction -Sol - gel processing -Solvothermal Synthesis-Photochemical Synthesis -Chemical Vapor Deposition(CVD) - Metal Oxide - Chemical Vapor Deposition (MOCVD).Physical Methods:Ball Milling -Electrodeposition - Spray Pyrolysis - DC/RF Magnetron Sputtering - Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE). (9)

CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOSTRUCTURESIntroduction, structural characterization, X-ray diffraction (XRD-Powder/Single crystal), Small angle X-ray scattering (SAXS),Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) - Energy Dispersive X-ray analysis (EDAX)- Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) -Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM)-Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM), UV-vis spectroscopy (liquid and solid state) - RamanSpectroscopy -X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) - Auger Electron spectroscopy (AES). (9)

APPLICATIONSSolar energy conversion and catalysis - Molecular electronics and printed electronics -Nanoelectronics -Polymers with a specialarchitecture - Liquid crystalline systems - Applications in displays and other devices -Nanomaterials for data storage -Photonics,Plasmonics- Chemical and biosensors -Nanomedicine and Nanobiotechnology. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Nano Technology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies, Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannargare., Geoff Smith Overseas

Press (2005)2. A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,Pradeep T., Tata McGrawHill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012.3. Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology,Hari Singh Nalwa,Academic Press, 2002.4. Introduction to Nanotechnology, Charles P.Poole, FrankJ.Owens, Wiley Interscience (2003)5. Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, B.S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B BRath, James Murday, Springer

Science & Business Media, 2013.

L T P C3 0 0 3

173

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Nanotechnology: A gentle introduction to the next Big idea, Mark A.Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Mark Ratne, Prentice Hall

P7R:1st Edition (2002)2. Fundamental properties of nanostructed materials Ed D. Fioran, G.Sberveglier, World Scientific 19943. Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics, Dupas C., Houdy P., Lahmani M., Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg,

2007

174

15POE02 - PHYSICS AND TECHNOLOGY OF THIN FILMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Recognize the fundamental growth and material parameters of thin films.CO2 : Evaluate and use models for nucleation and growth of thin films.CO3 : Asses the relation between deposition technique, film structure, and film properties.CO4 : Identify modern techniques for the characterization of thin filmsCO5 : Demonstrate the applications of thin films

PREPARATION OF THIN FILMSPreparation methods: electrolytic deposition, cathodic and anodic films, thermal evaporation, cathodic sputtering, chemicalvapour deposition. Molecular beam epitaxy and laser ablation methods. Thickness measurement and monitoring: electrical,mechanical, optical interference, microbalance, quartz crystal methods. (9)

GROWTH KINETICS OF THIN FILMSGeneral features.- nucleation theories - energy formation of a nucleus - critical nucleation parameters; spherical and nonspherical (cap, disc and cubic shaped) - Effect of electron bombardment on film structure. Post- nucleation growth, epitaxialfilms and growth. (9)

ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES OF CHARACTERIZATIONX-ray diffraction - photoluminescence - UV-Vis-IR spectrophotometer - Atomic Force Microscope - Scanning Electron Microscope- Hall effect - Vibrational Sample Magnetometer - Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry - X-ray Photoemission Spectroscopy -Auger emission spectroscopy. (9)

PROPERTIES OF THIN FILMSDielectric properties - experimental technique for the determination of dielectric properties - optical properties - experimentaltechnique for the determination of optical constants - mechanical properties - experimental technique for the determination ofmechanical properties of thin films - magnetic and superconducting properties. (9)

APPLICATIONSOptoelectronic devices : LED, LASER and Solar cell - Micro Electromechanical Systems (MEMS) - Fabrication of thin filmcapacitor - application of ferromagnetic thin films; data storage, Giant Magnetoresistance (GMR) - sensors - fabrication andcharacterization of thin film transistor and FET. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. A. Goswami, Thin Film Fundamentals, New Age international (P) Ltd. Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.2. L.I. Maissel and Glang (Eds.), Handbook of Thin film Technology, McGraw- Hill, 1970.3. K.L. Chopra, Thin Film Phenomena, McGraw-Hill (1983)

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Thin-Film Deposition : Principles and Practice, Smith Donald Donald L Smith Smith, McGraw-Hill Professional Pub, 19952. J.C. Anderson, The Use of Thin Films in Physical Investigation, Academic Press 1966.3. J.J. Coutts, Active and Passive Thin Film Devices, Academic Press 1978.4. George Hass, Physics of Thin Films: Volumes 1.:12, Academic Press 1963.5. KiyotakaWasa, Makoto Kitabatake, Hideaki Adachi, Thin Films Material Technology, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg,

2004.

L T P C3 0 0 3

175

15POE03 - SOLAR CELL FUNDAMENTALS AND MATERIALS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Demonstrate the knowledge about photovoltaics.CO2 : Gain knowledge about principle of operation of solar cellsCO3 : Realization about semiconducting materials used in the manufacture of PV cellsCO4 : Outline the various advanced solar cell technologies, their current status and future technological challenges

EVOLUTION OF SOLAR CELLSHistorical development; present and future global issues- commercialization/economic factors- basic components of PV systems-The solar spectrum - terrestrial and space spectra; air mass (AM0, AM1.5) -Introduction to 1st, 2nd and 3rd generationphotovoltaics. (9)

SOLAR CELL FUNDAMENTALSPhotovoltaic effect - Principle of direct solar energy conversion into electricity in a solar cell - light absorption- creating chargecarriers forming the electric field - driving the charge carriers - solar cell parameters- electrical characteristics - the ideal solarcell, solar cell in practice, the quantum efficiency and spectral response, optical properties - basics of solar cell device design.

(9)

SEMICONDUCTOR PROPERTIESOverview of semiconductor properties relevant to solar cell operations- semiconductor band structure, carrier statistics insemiconductors, the transport equations, carrier mobility, carrier generation by optical absorption-band to band transitions,free-carrier absorption, recombination- bulk recombination processes, surface recombination, minority carrier life time. (9)

SILICON AND THIN FILM SOLAR CELLSSi photovoltaics-single crystal silicon cells - semicrystalline and polycrystalline silicon cells - overview of various thin film solarcells:gallium arsenide solar cells - fabrication techniques, InP& cadmium telluride based solar cells - copper indium diselenidesolar cells - multijunction cells -environmental and health aspects. (9)

ADVANCED SOLAR CELLSAdvanced solar cell concepts -organic (polymer) photovoltaics -new concepts - quantum dots, wires, intermediate band, multipleexciton generation - Dye sensitized solar cells - perovskite solar cells - challenges in materials and device design -current andfuture research trends in PV. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Fonash S. J., "Solar Cell Device Physics", Academic, 2010.2. Goetzberger, J. Knobloch, and B. Voss "Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells" Wiley,1998.3. Green M. A. "Third Generation Photovoltaics: Advanced Solar Energy Conversion", Springer, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Chetan Singh Solanki., Solar Photovoltaic: "Fundamentals,Technologies and Application", PHI Learning Pvt., Ltd., 2009.2. Jha A.R., "Solar Cell Technology and Applications", CRC Press,2010.

L T P C3 0 0 3

176

15POE04 - ADVANCED MATERIAL PROCESSING TECHNOLOGIES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Recognize the criteria for material selection based on properties of materials and to choose the required material for

a specified application.CO2 : Understand various metallurgical forming processes such as casting, rolling extrusion, drawing, development of grain

structure and processing of different composite types.CO3 : Demonstrate knowledge about powder metallurgy, ceramic and polymer processing methods.CO4 : Identify and choose the required surface treatment technique for coating formation on account of enhancing the

surface properties of the mechanical components for engineering applications.CO5 : Understand the applicable joining and machining techniques and their limitations

SELECTION OF MATERIALS.Motivation for selection - Selection for mechanical properties, strength, toughness, fatigue and creep - Selection for surfacedurability, corrosion and wear resistance - Relationship between materials selection and processing - Case studies - aero, auto,marine, machinery and nuclear applications.High and low temperature materials, superconductors, supramagnetic materials,high entropy alloys,nanomaterials and biomaterials. (9)

METALLURGICAL FORMING AND PROCESSING OF COMPOSITESMetallurgical forming: Casting, rolling extrusion, drawing, development of grain structure for specific properties. Processing ofcomposites: lay up methods, press/ autoclave / resin transfer moulding, Reinforced reaction injection molding (RRIM), obtrusionand filament winding. (9)

POWDER METALLURGY, CERAMIC AND POLYMER PROCESSINGPowder metallurgy and ceramic processing: green fabrication methods, sintering, hot pressing, Hot isostatic pressing (HIP),spark plasma sintering, development of microstructure in powder processed materials.Polymer processing: extrusion, injectionmoulding, blow moulding, rotational moulding, vacuum forming and related processes processing of cellular polymers. (9)

COATING METHODSIntroduction to surface Engineering, Differences between surface and bulk, Properties of surfaces-wear, wettability. Chemicalvapour deposition, physical vapour deposition, electro deposition, electroless deposition, thermal spray processes. Principle ofvarious coating processes, process parameters, controlling the yield of coating and various surface properties of the coating.Criteria for selection of a surface coating technology. Product oriented surface coating technology. (9)

JOINING AND MACHININGJoining: fusion welding, solid state welding, adhesive bonding, mechanical joining and recent advancements in welding. Machining:Electromachining (electrochemical and electro-discharge), mechanical machining and recent advancements. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Charles J.A., Crane, F.A.A and Furness, J.A.G., "Selection and use of Engineering Materials", 3rd Edition, Butterworth-

Heinemann, 1977.2. BetzalelAvitzu, "Metal Forming- Processes and Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill, 1977.3. William F Hasford, Robert M Caddell "Metal Forming: Mechanics and Metallurgy" Cambridge University Press P.ltd,2007.4. Angelo P C and Subramanian R, "Powder Metallurgy Science, Technology and Applications", Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 2012.

L T P C3 0 0 3

177

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Michael Barsoum, "Fundamentals of Ceramics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co., INC, 19972. Gowariker V R, Viswanathan N V, JayadevSreedhar, "Polymer Science", New Age International P Ltd., 2005.3. David S. Rickerby, Allan Matthews, "Advanced surface coatings: a handbook of surface engineering", Blackie, 1991.4. Parmar, R.S, "Welding Engineering and Technology", Khanna Publishers, 2003.

178

15COE01 - MEDICAL NANO TECHNOLOGY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEThe students will be able toCO1 : Understand the essential features of nanomedicineCO2 : Identify the medical based nanotoolsCO3 : Assess health effects due to nanoparticle exposure

ASSESSING NANOTECHNOLOGY HEALTHNanomaterials : The Current State of Nanotechnology Application - Nanotechnology Risks - Risk Analysis - Hazard Identification- Exposure Assessment for Nanomaterials - Risk Characterization - Risk Management - Best Practices for Nanomaterials in theWorkplace - Safety Research - Needs for Engineered Nanoscale Materials (9)

RISK ASSESSMENT AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONContext for Technological Risk - Need for Risk Assessment for Nanotechnology - Adaptive Risk Assessment for Nanomaterials- Origins and Development of Risk Assessment - Risk Assessment Used in Environmental Decision Making - Issues in Applyingthe Four Steps of Risk Assessment to Nanotechnology - Hazard Assessment - Exposure Assessment - Dose - ResponseEvaluation (9)

SUSTAINABLE NANOTECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENTNecessity of Risk Assessment in Nanotechnology - The Pace of Nanotechnology Development and the Paucity of Information- Potential for Wide Dispersion in the Environment Amid Uncertainty - Few Standards or Guidelines - Environmental Risk Issues- Carbon Nanotubes - Defining the Toxic Dose - Environmentally Friendly Nanotechnology - Life Cycle Analysis for SustainableNanotechnology (9)

HUMAN HEALTH, TOXICOLOGY, AND NANOTECHNOLOGY RISKMechanisms of Toxicity - Types of Toxicological Studies - Pulmonary Toxicity Studies - Gastro intestinal Toxicity - In VitroStudies - Dermal - In Vitro Toxicity Studies (4)

ENVIRONMENTAL RISKSAntimicrobial Properties of Nanoscale Silver - Buckyballs, Titanium Dioxide - Short-term Toxicity Tests - Daphnia LC50 Assays- Studies of Nanomaterial Toxicity to Fish - Buckyballs and Bass-TiO2 in Arsenic - Field Studies - Environmental Exposures -Nanoscale Zerovalent Iron (9)

NANOELECTRONIC DEVICESResonant tunneling diodes - Field effect transistors - Single electron transfer devices - Potential effect transistors - Light emittingdiodes and lasers - Nanoelectromechanical system devices - Quantum dot cellular automata (5)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. GerogeW.Hanson, "Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics", Prentice Hall, 20072. Vladimir V. Mithin et.al, "Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications"

Cambridge University Press, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Mithin.V, Kochelap.V and Stroscio.M, "Introduction to Nanoelectronics", Cambridge University Press, 20082. Karl Gosar et.al, "Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices", Springer,

2005.

L T P C3 0 0 3

179

15COE02 - ADVANCED DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will be able to know the fundamentals of Nanoscience and their applications in pharamacological industriesCO2 : The students will able to describe polymeric drug delivery systems and their encapsulation methodology to study

targeted drug delivery with different polymeric systemsCO3 : The students will able to identify lipids-nanocarriers and their application in biological systemCO4 : The students will able to study site specific drug delivery for gene therapy

THEORY OF ADVANCED DRUG DELIVERYFundamentals of Nanocarriers - Size, Surface, Magnetic and Optical Properties, Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics ofNano drug carriers. Critical Factors in drug delivery. Transport of Nanoparticles - In Vitro and Ex Vivo Models. (10)

POLYMERS Dendrimers- Synthesis -Nanoscale containers- Dendritic Nanoscafold systems Biocompatibility of Dendrimers,Gene transfection. pH based targeted delivery- chitosan and alginate. Copolymers in targeted drug delivery- PCL,PLA, PLGA.

(8)

LIPID BASED NANOCARRIERSLiposomes, niosomes and solid lipid nanoparticles. Ligand based delivery by liposomes. Cubosomes. (9)

MICROBES AND ANTIBODY BASED NANOCARRIERSBacterial dependent delivery of vaccines. Drug delivery and subcellular targeting by virus, Drug packaging and drug loading.Delivery of therapeutics by antibodies and antibodybioconjugates. (9)

SITE SPECIFIC DRUG DELIVERYConcepts and mechanism of Site specific drug delivery- Microneedles, Micropumps, microvalves. Implantable microchips.

(9)TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Drug Delivery: Engineering Principles for Drug Therapy, M. Salzman, Oxford University Press, 2001.2. Drug Delivery and Targeting, A.M. Hillery, CRC Press, 2002.3. Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications, B. Wang, Wiley Intersceince, 2005.4. Nanoparticle Technology for Drug Delivery, Ram B. Gupta, Uday B. Kompella Taylor & Francis, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

180

15COE03 - BIOSENSORS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : The students will able to understand protein based biosensors and their enzyme reactivity, stability and their application

in protein based nano crystalline thin film processingCO2 : The students will able to describe DNA based biosensors to study the presence of heavy metals in the food productsCO3 : The students will able to understand fluorescence, UV-Vis and electrochemical applications of biosensorsCO4 : The students will able to study about the fabrication of biosensors and its application as nanochip analyzer

PROTEIN BASED BIOSENSORSNano structure for enzyme stabilization - Single enzyme nano particles - Nanotubes microporus silica - Protein based nanocrystalline Diamond thin film for processing (9)

DNA BASED BIOSENSORHeavy metal complexing with DNA and its determination water and food samples - DNA zymo biosensors (9)

ELECTRO CHEMICAL APPLICATIONDetection in biosensors - Flurorescence - Absorption - Electrochemical. Integration of various techniques - Fibre optic biosensors

(9)

FABRICATION OF BIOSENSORSTechniques used for microfabrication - Microfabrication of electrodes - On chip analysis (9)

BIOSENSORS IN RESEARCHFuture direction in biosensor research - Designed protein pores-as components of biosensors - Molecular design -Bionanotechnology for cellular biosensing - Biosensors for drug discovery - Nanoscale biosensors (9)

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Biosensors: A Practical Approach, J. Cooper & C. Tass, Oxford University Press, 20042. Nanomaterials for Biosensors, Cs. Kumar, Willey - VCH, 20073. Smart Biosensor Technology, G.K. Knoff, A.S. Bassi, CRC Press, 2006.

L T P C3 0 0 3

181

15COE04 - NANOCOMPOSITES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEThe students will be able toCO1 : Study the different synthesis techniques of metal ceramic nanocomposites and their functionalityCO2 : Describe the processing techniques for heterometallic nanocomposites and to study their electromagnetical propertyCO3 : Understand the design of super hard nanocomposites with improved mechanical propertiesCO4 : Study the polymer based carbon nanotube composites, to study their mechanical properties and their industrial

applications

NANO CERAMICSMetal-Oxide or Metal-Ceramic composites, Different aspects of their preparation techniques and their final properties andfunctionality. (9)

METAL BASED NANOCOMPOSITESMetal-metal nanocomposites, some simple preparation techniques and their new electrical and magnetic properties. (9)

DESIGN OF SUPER HARD MATERIALSSuper hard nanocomposites, its designing and improvements of mechanical properties. (9)

NEW KIND OF NANOCOMPOSITESFractal based glass-metal nanocomposites, its designing and fractal dimension analysis. Electrical property of fractal basednanocomposites. Core-Shell structured nanocomposites. (9)

POLYMER BASED NANOCOMPOSITESPreparation and characterization of diblock Copolymer based nanocomposites; Polymercarbon nanotubes based composites,their mechanical properties, and industrial possibilities. (9)

TOTAL : 45

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Nanocomposites Science and Technology - P. M. Ajayan, L.S. Schadler, P. V. Braun 2006.2. Physical Properties of Carbon Nanotubes- R. Saito 1998.3. Carbon Nanotubes (Carbon, Vol 33) - M. Endo, S. Iijima, M.S. Dresselhaus 1997.4. The search for novel, superhard materials- Stan Veprek (Review Article) JVST A, 19995. Electromagnetic and magnetic properties of multi component metal oxides, hetero6. Nanometer versus micrometer-sized particles-Christian Brosseau,Jamal Ben, Youssef, Philippe Talbot, Anne-Marie Konn,

(Review Article) J. Appl. Phys, Vol 93, 20037. Diblock Copolymer, - Aviram (Review Article), Nature, 2002

L T P C3 0 0 3

182

15COE05 - BIOREFINERY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMEThe students will be able toCO1 : Understand various renewable feedstocks for biofuels productionCO2 : Understand the broad concept of second and third generation biofuel products from biomass and other low-cost agri-

residues and biowastes.CO3 : Analyze the design processes for biofuel production

CHEMISTRY & BIOCHEMISTRY OF BIOMASSTypes of biomass (e.g. wood waste, forestry residues, agricultural residues, perennial annual crops, organic municipal solidwaste). Composition of lignocellulose (lignin, hemicellulose, cellulose); energy crops; chemical pretreatment; enzymaticpretreatment; degradation of cellulose; trichoderma cellulases; bacterial cellulases; and comparison with degradation of highstarch. (9)

BIODIESELSources and processing of biodiesel, nature of lipids, fatty acids and triglycerides.Sources and characteristics of lipids for useas biodiesel feedstock; and conversion of feedstock into biodiesel, (transesterification). Use of vegetable oil (SVO) and wastevegetable oil (WVO). Environmental issues of biodiesel; major policies and regulations pertaining to the production, distribution,and use of biodiesel. (9)

BIOMETHANE OR BIOGASHydrolysis; anaerobic digestion; methanogenesis (acetoclastic, hydrogenotrophic), rates of methane formation; and one andtwo stage fermentation.Thermal depolymerization.Use of exhaust gases (e.g. CO2, H2S and H2) from geothermal power plantsand industrial operations (e.g. coal and oil refineries) as an energy sources (methane and hydrogen) (9)

GASIFICATION & PYROLYSIS TECHNOLOGIESGasification processes and the main types of gasifier designs; production of electricity by combining a gasifier with a gasturbine or fuel cell.Combined- cycle electricity generation with gas and steam turbines, and generation of heat and steam fordistrict heating systems or CHP, including kalina Cycle. Production of synthesis gas (i.e. CO, H2, H2O, CO2) tar vapor and ashparticles) for subsequent conversion to hydrogen and transport fuels; advanced gas cleaning technologies for biomass. Biologicalconversion of syngas into liquid biofuels. Fast pyrolysis technology to produce a range of fuels, chemicals, and fertilizers;biorefineries, and new uses for glycerine in biorefineries. (9)

POLICIES AND FUTURE R&D OF BIOFUELS & BIOENERGYAnalysis of both current and future EU regulations and directives on biofuels and bioenergy.Tax regulations. Evaluation ofdifferent production alternatives to produce bioenergy; competitiveness of bioenergy alternatives in agriculture compared toother energy sources. Evaluation of current and future R&D needs; legal framework to support sustainable development andincreased use of biofuels; government policies and programs with regard to biofuels and investment opportunities worldwide.

(9)TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Robert C.Brown, "Biorenewable Resourses: Engineering", New Products from Agriculture, Wiley- Blackwell Publishing,

20032. Samir K.Khanal, "Anaerobic Biotechnology for Bioenergy Production: Principles and Application", Wiley- Blackwell Publishing

2008

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Martin Kaltschmitt; Hermann Hofbauer. "Biomass Conversion and Biorefinery", Springer Publishing, 2008

L T P C3 0 0 3

183

15HOE01 - PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Design the Management function for a given organizationCO2 : Design and develop a strategic approach for the completion of the projectCO3 : Analyze the behavior of individuals and groups in organizations in terms of the key factorsCO4 : Formulate the procedure for recruitment, selection, training of staff to establish an organization

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENTMeaning, Definition and Significance of Management-Basic functions of Management-Development of Management Thought

(9)

MANAGEMENT CONCEPTSPlanning, Organizing, Staffing, Directing and Controlling- MBO-Six sigma (9)

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORSignificance of OB, Role of Leadership, Personality and Motivation, Stress, Attitudes, Values and Perceptions at work (9)

BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERINGNeed for BPR, Various phases of BPR, Production and Productivity-Factors influencing Productivity. (8)

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENTEvolution of Management- Development of Managerial skills-Human Resource Management - Objectives -Job analysis -Recruitment -Selection and Placement and Training Development (10)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Harold Koontz, Heinz Weihrich and Ramachandra Aryasri, "Principles of Management" Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

20132. Mamoria, CB, "Personnel Management", Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Robbin Finchanm and Peter Rhodes, "Principles of Organizational Behavior" Oxford University Press, 20102. CB Gupta "Management Theory and Practice" Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi, 20093. VSP Rao " Management Text and Cases" Excel Books, New Delhi, 20094. Fred Luthans " Organizational Behavior" Mc-Graw hill, New York 20055. Knanna OP "Industrial Engineering and Management", Dhanpat Rai publications, New Delhi 2003

L T P C3 0 0 3

184

15HOE02 - CURRENT TRENDS IN INDIAN ECONOMY

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Outline the structure of our Indian Economic SystemCO2 : Access the role of industrial sector in Indian economyCO3 : Interpret the demographic trends for the current scenarioCO4 : Analyze the role of two tier for the achievement of common national goals

NATIONAL INCOME AND AGRICULTURE SECTOREconomics Development-Meaning-National Income and Per capita Income in India- Indian Planning-Agricultural Developmentof India: Major crops- Production-Productivity-Contribution to GDP and Exports (8)

INDUSTRIAL SECTORIndia's industrial development-Industrial policies of 1948, 1956 and 1991-Liberalisation-Public sector-Privatization-Disinvestmentpolicy-Role and importance of large scale industries and small scale industries-Special economic zones-Contribution to GDP-Growth rate (8)

POPULATIONGrowth and policy issues-Demographic trends-Vital statistics-India's population: size and growth rate-Demographic dividend-HDI-Population policy-Issues of Unemployment, Poverty and inequality in India (10)

SERVICE SECTORService sector in India-Banking-Insurance-Telecommunication-IT sector-Sofware exports-BPO-Contribution to GDP (9)

FEDERAL SYSTEM AND FOREIGN TRADEFederal setup in India-Taxes: Direct and Indirect Tax-Value added Tax-Foreign direct investment-Merits and Demerits-India'simports and exports: Composition and direction-Foreign exchange reserve position- MNC's in India (10)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Ruddar Datt and Sundaram, KPM, Indian Economy, S.Chand and company, New Delhi-2015 Ramesh Singh Indian Economy,

McGraw hill Education 7th edition, 2015

REFERENCE1. www.jagranjosh.com

L T P C3 0 0 3

185

15HOE03 - MONETARY ECONOMICS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Evaluate the monetary measures formulated through static and dynamic role of moneyCO2 : Design the driving force of circular flow of moneyCO3 : Analyse how quantity theory of money fluctuate the price levelCO4 : Estimate the demand and supply of money based on the Interest rate

NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF MONEYDefinition of Money-Functions of Money-Static and Dynamic role of Money-Circular flow of Money-Monetary standards-Goldstandard-Paper currency standard-Principles of Note issue-Measures of Money supply (9)

QUANTITY THEORY OF MONEYFisher's quantity theory of Money-Assumptions-Cash Balance Approach (Cambridge Equations)- Equation of Marshall, Pigouand Keynes-Similarities and dissimilarities of cash balance and cash transaction approaches-Income and expenditure theory-Superiority of Income and expenditure theory-Demand for Money : Classical and Keynesian liquidity preference theory approach

(9)

INFLATION AND DEFLATIONMeaning-Types-Causes of Inflation-Demand Pull and Cost push inflation -Inflationary Gap-Phillips Curve-Effects of Inflation-Deflation-Causes-Measures to control Inflation and Deflation-Stagflation (9)

COMMERCIAL BANKING AND FINANCIAL MARKETSFunctions of Commercial Banks-Credit Creation-Meaning and constitute of Money Markets-Capital Market-Institutional structureof Capital Market-Primary Market-Secondary Market-Indian capital Market-Non-Banking financial intermediaries (9)

CENTRAL BANKING AND MONETARY POLICYCentral Banking-Functions-Organization-Instruments of Credit control-Monetary Policy: Meaning, Objectives, and Recent policychanges in RBI-Monetary Policy in a developing economy (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Jhinghan ML "Monetary Economics:" Vrinda Publications, New Delhi 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Sethi TT, "Monetary Economic Theory", S Chand & Co, New Delhi 19962. Mithani DN, "Money Banking and International Trade", Himalaya, Mumbai 2013

L T P C3 0 0 3

186

15HOE04 - ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERIAL DECISIONS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Differentiate Financial and Management AccountingCO2 : Analyze the profit and loss of the firm using the classifications of ratio analysisCO3 : Prepare a fund flow statementCO4 : Sketch the Break even chart and interpret the results for a given data

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTINGIntroduction to Management Accounting - Nature and Scope of Management Accounting - Importance - Functions - Distinguishbetween Financial and Management Accounting - Tools in Management Accounting - Limitations - Disadvantages (9)

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSRatio Analysis - Meaning - Significance - Classifications - Liquidity Ratios - Turnover Ratios - Profitability Ratios - SolvencyRatios (8)

FUND FLOW AND CASH FLOW STATEMENTMeaning and concept of flow of Funds-Meaning of fund Flow Statement - Difference between Fund flow statement and Incomestatement - Preparation and Interpretation of cash flow statement (9)

INVESTMENT DECISIONBudgeting - Objectives - Features - Advantages - Disadvantages - Cash Budget - Flexible Budget (9)

MARGINAL COSTING AND WORKING CAPITAL MEASUREMENTMarginal Costing - Importance - Advantages - Breakeven Point - Breakeven Chart - Margin of Safety - Profit Volume Analysis -Working Capital - Importance - Factors Affecting Working Capital - Computation of Working Capital Requirements (10)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. R.K.Sharma and Sasi K.Gupta, "Management accounting", 2014

L T P C3 0 0 3

187

15HOE05 - ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Develop an entrepreneurial mindset by learning key skills such as creative thinking, innovations and funding for

businessCO2 : Formulate a business planCO3 : Assess the strengths and weaknesses of business planCO4 : Prepare a business plan for selecting a product

LAUNCHING ENTREPRENEURIAL VENTURESCreativity, Innovations, Methods to Initiate Ventures, Legal Challenges, Search for Entrepreneurial Capital (8)

BUSINESS PLAN FOR NEW VENTURESMeaning and Objectives of a Business Plan, Advantages and cost of preparing a Business Plan, Elements, Critical Assessment

(9)

Strategic Perspectives - Strategic Growth, Need for Strategic Planning, Understanding the growth stage, Unique managerialConcerns of growing enterprise, Valuation Concerns (10)

Entrepreneurship - Indian Perspective: Historical Perspective, Global Indian Entrepreneurs, Institutions, Modern Entrepreneurs (9)

Project Work - Students have to prepare a detailed business plan selecting a product(s), Presentation of such business plansand submission after necessary corrections suggested by subject faculty. (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Robert D Hisrich, Michael P Peters & Dean Shepherd, "Entrepreneurship", Tata McGraw Hill, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Thomas W.Zimmerer, Norman M.Scarborough, "Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management", Prentice

Hall of India, 20092. G.S.Sudha, "Management and Entrepreneurship Development", Indus Valley Publication, 2009

L T P C3 0 0 3

188

15HOE06 - EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Set a goal and outline stratigies to achieve itCO2 : Prepare a job application letter with a resume for a position in a corporate sector

CO3 : Analyse the listening comprehension and answer the questions

CO4 : Find a solution for a problem in the corporate sector applying problem solving skills

GOAL SETTING AND TIME MANAGEMENTGoal Setting - Immediate, Short Term and Long Term Goals - Smart Goals - Strategies to Achieve Goals - Confidence Building,Self-esteem, Motivation - Time Management - Identifying Time Wasters - Time Management Skills. (9)

SPEAKINGIce-breakers - Self introduction - Role Play - Debate - Group Discussion: Purpose - Group Behavior - Analyzing Performance.Job Interviews: Identifying Job Openings - Interview Process - Types of Questions - Mock Interviews - Professional Grooming.

(11)

READING AND WRITINGReading Comprehension - Speed Reading Necessary for Reading Letters and Files - Vocabulary Development - Preparing JobApplications - Writing Covering Letter and Résumé - Applying for Jobs Online - Creative Writing - Article Writing - Book Review

(9)

LISTENINGListening to - Conversations, Long Speeches, Narrations, Descriptions, Famous Speeches. (8)

LEADERSHIP AND TEAM MANAGEMENTQualities of a Good Leader - Leadership Styles - Decision Making - Problem Solving - Etiquettes - Email, Professional, Dining& Telephone - Team Building - Team Work - Delegation. (8)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Aruna Koneru. "Professional Communication". Tata MacGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited. New Delhi, 2008.

2. Jones, Leo and Richard Alexander. "New International Business English" Cambridge University Press, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Corneilssen, Joep. "How to Prepare for Group Discussion and Interview". New Delhi: Tata-McGraw-Hill, 2009.

L T P C3 0 0 3

189

15HOE07 - ENGLISH FOR ACADEMIC PURPOSES

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Write a description of a system.CO2 : Formulate a research paperCO3 : Listen to a lecture and prepare a summary.CO4 : Construct dialogues using appropriate expressions.

FOCUS ON LANGUAGESentence Construction- Types of Clauses- Sequence words - Co ordination- Subordination- Paragraphing Information - Describinga System & Procedure (8)

READINGUnderstand a writer's purpose - Use strategies to ascertain meaning from unfamiliar vocabulary encountered in context - Recalland use vocabulary regarding urbanization and mega cities - To identify and outline main ideas in a passage - Skim a readingpassage for main ideas - Summarize texts and images - Using a dictionary to obtain lexical, phonological and orthographicalinformation - Identify and use target vocabulary words - Highlight important parts and texts. (8)

WRITINGAchieving appropriate tone and style in Academic Writing - writing a Research Article - Types of Research Designs - Choosinga Research Problem- The Abstract - The Introduction - The Literature Review . The Methodology - The Results - The Discussion- The Conclusion - Citing Sources - Proof reading Your Paper (10)

LISTENINGListening to conversation - Lectures - Topics - Discussions - Listening comprehension on specific topics - Listening to recognizeformal and Informal spoken English (8)

SPEAKINGSeminar skills - Engage in verbal role playing in formal and informal situation. - Express advice and personal opinions withsupporting information - Paraphrase stories and information - Expressing requests - Suggestions - Complaints - Apology -Giving and accepting compliments - Making invitations - Refusing invitations (11)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. MLA Handbook 8th edition published 2016. ISBN : 9781603292627

REFERENCE BOOKS1. English for writing Research papers, Authors : Wall work, Adrian Published 2016, Spinger Publication.

L T P C3 0 0 3

190

15HOE08 - ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMS

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Listen to TOEFL, IELTS and GRE exercises and formulate appropriate answers.CO2 : Speak using right grammar and appropriate pronunciation on general and academic topics.CO3 : Analyze the passage and answer the question.CO4 : Generate and organize ideas on a given topic

LISTENINGListening to conversation - Narration - Suggestion - Assumptions - Predictions - Implications - Problems - Academic Conversations- Discussions - Lectures (11)

SPEAKINGIndependent speaking - Integrated speaking - Speaking about a personal experience - Preferences - Report the speakersopinion - Explain a problem and solution give a summary of a academic lecture.

(13)

READINGRead and understand short passages - Integrated reading tasks - Read the passage and choose the right summary of thepassage - Reading for main ideas - Scanning the passage for synonyms - Making inferences - Identifying exceptions - Locatingreferences. (12)

WRITINGIndependent writing - Integrated writing - Writing short essays - Writing dialogues - Articles - Sentence construction (9)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOK1. Sharpe J.Pamela. Barron's How to prepare for the TOEFL Test of English as a foreign Language. 11th Edition, Galgotia

Publications Pvt.Ltd: New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Sharpe J.Pamela. Barron's TOEFL iBT Internet- Based Test. 12th Edition, Galgotia publications Pvt.Ltd: New Delhi, 2009.2. Longman Indroductory course for the TOEFL Test.

L T P C3 0 0 3

191

15HOE09 - LIFE AND LITERATURE

ASSESSMENT : THEORY

COURSE OUTCOMECO1 : Compose an essay on the prose pieceCO2 : Analyse the poem and write a critical appreciation of itCO3 : Read the story and find the moral values implied in the storiesCO4 : Write a review of the fiction

PROSEThe Postmaster by Rabindranath Tagore,Snapshot of a Dog by J G ThurberOn the Rule of the Road by A.G. GardinerThe Village Schoolmaster by Oliver GoldsmithIncident of the French Camp by Robert Browning (13)

POEMSStopping By Woods on a Snowy Evening by Robert FrostThe Ballad of Father Gilligan by W.B. Yeats (9)

SHORT STORIESThe Model Millionaire by Oscar WildeThe Ant and the Grasshopper by W. Somerset MaughamThe Doll's House by Katherine Mansfield, Biography (10)Albert Einstein and Steve Jobs

FICTIONThe Old Man and the Sea by Ernest HemmingwayThe Scarlet Pimpernel by Baroness Emma OrczyPractice in creative writing, review writing (13)

TOTAL : 45

TEXT BOOKS1. Kumara Pillai. ed. A Book of Modern Short Stories. Macmillan: New Delhi, 20092. Colleen and Darius Krishnaraj. ed. Convergence, A Book of Short Stories. Macmillan: New Delhi, 20093. Ernest Hemmingway. The Old Man and the Sea. Arrow: Warwickshire, 2000.4. Baroness Emma Orczy, The Scarlet Pimpernel. Hutchinson : 1995

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Xavier. ed. An Anthology of Popular Essays and Poems. Macmillan: New Delhi, 2009

L T P C3 0 0 3

COIMBATORE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY...15EC81 Project Work & Viva Voce - - 6 - EEC TOTAL CREDITS 18...

Documents

Transcript of COIMBATORE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY...15EC81 Project Work & Viva Voce - - 6 - EEC TOTAL CREDITS 18...